2009 Chevrolet Kodiak Manual en CA

Seats and Restraint System ............................. 1-1Front Seats ............................................... 1-2Rear Seats .............................................. 1-10Safety Belts ............................................. 1-11Child Restraints ....................................... 1-28Airbag System ......................................... 1-48Restraint System Check ............................ 1-59

Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1Keys ........................................................ 2-2Doors and Locks ....................................... 2-6Windows .................................................. 2-8Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ........... 2-10Mirrors .................................................... 2-51Storage Areas ......................................... 2-53

Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4Climate Controls ...................................... 3-20Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ........ 3-23Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-48

Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ....... 4-2Towing ................................................... 4-23

Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1Service ..................................................... 5-3Fuel ......................................................... 5-6Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-22Rear Axle ............................................... 5-67Four-Wheel Drive ..................................... 5-68Front Axle ............................................... 5-69Noise Control System ............................... 5-70Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-71Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-71Other Service Items .................................. 5-72Tires ...................................................... 5-76Appearance Care ..................................... 5-87Vehicle Identification ................................. 5-94Electrical System ...................................... 5-95Capacities and Specifications ................... 5-102Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 5-108

Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2

Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1Customer Assistance and Information ........... 7-2Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 7-9Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ........... 7-11

Index ................................................................ 1

2009 Chevrolet Kodiak Owner Manual M

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and thename KODIAK are registered trademarks of GeneralMotors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at the time itwas printed. GM reserves the right to make changesafter that time without further notice.

This manual describes features that may or may not beon your specific vehicle.

Read this manual from beginning to end to learn aboutthe vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures, symbols,and words work together to explain vehicle operation.

Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.

IndexTo quickly locate information about the vehicle use theIndex in the back of the manual. It is an alphabeticallist of what is in the manual and the page number whereit can be found.

Safety Warnings and Symbols

A circle with a slashthrough it is a safetysymbol which means“Do Not,” “Do not dothis” or “Do not let thishappen.”

A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell aboutthings that could hurt you or others if you were to ignorethe warning.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 25778612 A First Printing ©2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

ii

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that could hurtyou or other people.

Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoidor reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.

A notice tells about something that can damage thevehicle.

Notice: These mean there is something that coulddamage your vehicle.

Many times, this damage would not be covered by thevehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The noticetells what to do to help avoid the damage.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle which usethe same words, CAUTION or Notice.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation or informationrelating to a specific component, control, message,gage, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown when you need to see yourowner manual for additional instructions or information.

* : This symbol is shown when you need to see aservice manual for additional instructions or information.

iii

Vehicle Symbol ChartHere are some additional symbols that may be found onthe vehicle and what they mean. For more informationon the symbol, refer to the index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gage

+ : Fuses

i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

j : LATCH System Child Restraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

F : Traction Control

M : Windshield Washer Fluid

iv

Front Seats ......................................................1-2Bucket Seats .................................................1-2Split Bench Seat (80/20 Split) ..........................1-6Air Suspension Seats ......................................1-6

Rear Seats .....................................................1-10Rear Seat Operation .....................................1-10

Safety Belts ...................................................1-11Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-11How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-16Lap-Shoulder Belt .........................................1-24Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-26Lap Belt ......................................................1-27Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-28

Child Restraints .............................................1-28Older Children ..............................................1-28Infants and Young Children ............................1-32Child Restraint Systems .................................1-36Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-38Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) ......................................1-40Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Outside Seat Position (Crew Cab) ................1-40

Securing a Child Restraint in the CenterRear Seat Position (Crew Cab) ...................1-42

Securing a Child Restraint in the CenterFront Seat Position ....................................1-44

Securing a Child Restraint in the RightFront Seat Position ....................................1-44

Airbag System ...............................................1-48Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-50When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-52What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-53How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-53What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? ........1-54Airbag Off Switch ..........................................1-55Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-58Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................1-58Restraint System Check ..................................1-59

Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-59Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ............................................1-60

Section 1 Seats and Restraint System

1-1

Front Seats

Bucket SeatsOn vehicles with bucket seats, you can adjust the seatsseveral different ways.

Fore-and-Aft Adjustment

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try toadjust the seat while the vehicle is moving. Thesudden movement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you do not wantto. Adjust the driver’s seat only when the vehicle isnot moving.

You can adjust the seat forward or rearward with thebar located under the front of the seat cushion.

Lift the bar to unlock the seat. Slide the seat to where youwant it and release the bar. Try to move the seat withyour body to be sure the seat is locked in place.

1-2

Lumbar AdjustmentYour seats may have this feature.

The lumbar adjustmentknob is located on theseatback, on the inboardside of the driver’s seat andon the outboard side of thepassenger’s seat.

For more support to your lower back, turn the lumbaradjustment knob clockwise. To decrease the amount oflumbar support, turn the knob counterclockwise.

1-3

Seatback Adjustment

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try toadjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle ismoving. The sudden movement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push a pedal when youdo not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If either seatback is not locked, it could moveforward in a sudden stop or crash. That couldcause injury to the person sitting there. Alwayspush and pull on the seatbacks to be sure theyare locked.

The recline lever is located on the outboard side of thedriver’s and passenger’s seat cushions.

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position, thenrelease the lever to lock the seatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it islocked.

To return the seatback to an upright position, do thefollowing:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to theseatback and the seatback will return to the uprightposition.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it islocked.

1-4

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle isin motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckleup, your safety belts cannot do their job when youare reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,you could go into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash thebelt could go up over your abdomen. The beltforces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.This could cause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle is inmotion, have the seatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear your safety beltproperly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

1-5

Split Bench Seat (80/20 Split)If your vehicle has a split bench seat, the passengerseat is not adjustable.

There is a storage area underneath the seat cushion.See Storage Areas on page 2-53.

Air Suspension SeatsYour vehicle may have a low-back or high-back airsuspension seat. There are several ways to adjustthe seat.

Fore-and-Aft Adjustment

If your vehicle has this leverit is located underneath thefront of the driver’s seat.

To slide the seat forward or rearward, move the levertoward the outboard side of the seat. The seat will lock inat 1/2 inch (1.5 cm) increments. Try to move the seat withyour body to be sure the seat is locked in place.

1-6

Height Adjustment

On a vehicle with an air suspension seat heightadjustment lever, it is located on the front inboard sideof the seat.

To adjust the height of the air suspension seat, pull thelever up to inflate. Push the lever down to deflate.

Your seat cushion may also be able to be raised orlowered.

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the seat cushionheight adjustment handle islocated underneath thefront of the seat.

To adjust the height of the cushion, lift the handle upand pull it forward. You can choose between twosettings.

Seat Height AdjustmentLever

1-7

Lumbar Adjustment

If your vehicle has a lumbar adjustment knob, it islocated on the inboard side of the driver’s seatback, oron the outboard side of the passenger’s seatback.

For more support to your lower back, turn the lumbaradjustment knob clockwise. To decrease the amount oflumbar support, turn the knob counterclockwise.

Seatback AdjustmentYour vehicle has a seatback adjustment control locatedon the outboard side of the seat.

Recline the seatback by turning the controlcounterclockwise.

Return the seatback to an upright position by turning thecontrol clockwise.

Lumbar AdjustmentKnob

1-8

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle isin motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckleup, your safety belts cannot do their job when youare reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,you could go into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash thebelt could go up over your abdomen. The beltforces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.This could cause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle is inmotion, have the seatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear your safety beltproperly.

Chugger-Snubber Lock-Out Feature

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the handle islocated on the outboardside of the driver’sand passenger’s seats.

Move the handle down to reduce any backslapexperienced while in tractor/trailer operation or whileoperating a dump truck application.

1-9

Rear Seats

Rear Seat Operation

Folding the Rear Seat (Crew Cab)

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properlyattached, or twisted will not provide the protectionneeded in a crash. The person wearing the beltcould be seriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure that the safetybelts are properly routed and attached, and arenot twisted.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety beltsstill fastened may cause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle the safety beltsand return them to their normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

The rear bench seat on the crew cab can be foldeddown to provide more cargo space.

To fold down the seatback,pull the strap located onthe rear of the seat, whilepulling the seatback down.

To raise a seatback, pull the nylon strap while raisingthe seatback until it locks upright.

{CAUTION:

If either seatback is not locked, it could moveforward in a sudden stop or crash. That couldcause injury to the person sitting there. Alwayspush and pull on the seatbacks to be sure theyare locked.

After raising a seatback to an upright position, push andpull on the seatback to check that it is locked in place.

1-10

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis section of the manual describes how to usesafety belts properly. It also describes some things notto do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannotbe worn properly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, theinjuries can be much worse. You can hit thingsinside the vehicle harder or be ejected from thevehicle. You and your passenger(s) can beseriously injured or killed. In the same crash, youmight not be, if you are buckled up. Always fastenyour safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)are restrained properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are more likely to beseriously injured or killed. Do not allow people toride in any area of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat and using asafety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle thesafety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-26for additional information.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do havea crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be soserious that even buckled up, a person would not survive.But most crashes are in between. In many of them,people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walkaway. Without safety belts, they could have been badlyhurt or killed.

1-11

After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, thefacts are clear. In most crashes buckling up doesmatter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fast asit goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat onwheels.

Put someone on it.

1-12

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The riderdoes not stop.

The person keeps going until stopped by something. Ina real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

1-13

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,and your strongest bones take the forces. That is whysafety belts make such good sense.

1-14

Questions and Answers About SafetyBelts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if Iam wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safetybelt or not. But your chance of being consciousduring and after an accident, so you can unbuckleand get out, is much greater if you are belted.And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you areupside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have towear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so theywork with safety belts — not instead of them.Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupantsstill have to buckle up to get the most protection.That is true not only in frontal collisions, butespecially in side and other collisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far fromhome, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in acrash — even one that is not your fault — you andyour passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a gooddriver does not protect you from things beyond yourcontrol, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) ofhome. And the greatest number of serious injuriesand deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph(65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

1-15

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis section is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to know aboutsafety belts and children. And there are differentrules for smaller children and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-28 orInfants and Young Children on page 1-32. Followthose rules for everyone’s protection.

It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out ofthe vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others inthe vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safetybelt, there is important information you should know. Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in

front of you. The lap part of the belt should be wornlow and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In acrash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bonesand you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.If you slid under it, the belt would apply force onyour abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These parts of the body arebest able to take belt restraining forces.The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop orcrash.

1-16

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give asmuch protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt istoo loose. In a crash, you would move forward toomuch, which could increase injury. The shoulderbelt should fit snugly against your body.

1-17


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly asmuch protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is tooloose. In a crash, you could slide under the lapbelt and apply force on your abdomen. This couldcause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

1-18


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckledin the wrong place like this. In a crash, the beltwould go up over your abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not on the pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internal injuries. Alwaysbuckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.

1-19


A: The belt is over an armrest.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt goes overan armrest like this. The belt would be much toohigh. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. Thebelt force would then be applied on the abdomen,not on the pelvic bones, and that could causeserious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goesunder the armrests.

1-20


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It shouldbe worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear theshoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, yourbody would move too far forward, which wouldincrease the chance of head and neck injury. Also,the belt would apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulder bones. Youcould also severely injure internal organs like yourliver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go overthe shoulder and across the chest.

1-21


A: The belt is behind the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by not wearing thelap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you wouldnot be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your bodycould move too far forward increasing the chanceof head and neck injury. You might also slideunder the lap belt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and across the chest.

1-22


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In acrash, you would not have the full width of the beltto spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, makeit straight so it can work properly, or ask yourdealer/retailer to fix it.

1-23

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulderbelt except for the center passenger positions (ifequipped), which have a lap belt. See Lap Belt onpage 1-27 for more information.

The following instructions explain how to wear alap-shoulder belt properly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you cansit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.Do not let it get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, let the beltgo back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the beltacross you more slowly.If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulledout all the way, the child restraint locking featuremay be engaged. If this happens, let the beltgo back all the way and start again.

3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 1-28.Position the release button on the buckle so thatthe safety belt could be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,move it to the height that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in thissection for instructions on use and important safetyinformation.

1-24

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safetybelt through the latch plate to fully tighten thelap belt on smaller occupants.

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should return to its stowed position.

Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out ofthe way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,damage can occur to both the belt and the vehicle.

1-25

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentThe vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for eachseating position next to a window.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the beltis centered on the shoulder. The belt should be awayfrom the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder.Improper shoulder belt height adjustment couldreduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.

To move it down, press inat the top of the arrowsand move the heightadjuster to the desiredposition. You can move theheight adjuster up justby pushing up on theshoulder belt guide.

After you move the height adjuster to where you want it,try to move it down without pressing in to make sureit has locked into position.

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likely to beseriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, andthe lap portion should be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is morelikely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. Forpregnant women, as for anyone, the key to makingsafety belts effective is wearing them properly.

1-26

Lap BeltThis part is only for the lap belt. To learn how to wear alap-shoulder belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-24.

You vehicle may have a center seating position.When you sit in the center front or rear seating position,you may have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.

To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull italong the belt.

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shownuntil the belt is snug.

Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lappart of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt is not longenough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-28.

Make sure the release button on the buckle is positionedso you would be able to unbuckle the safety beltquickly if you ever had to.

1-27

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the safety belt will fasten around you, you shoulduse it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, yourdealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you goin to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,so the extender will be long enough for you. To helpavoid personal injury, do not let someone else useit, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. Theextender has been designed for adults. Never use it forsecuring child seats. To wear it, attach it to theregular safety belt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes with the extender.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seats shouldwear the vehicle’s safety belts.

1-28

The manufacturer’s instructions that come with thebooster seat, state the weight and height limitations forthat booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulderbelt until the child passes the below fit test:

• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bendat the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return tothe booster seat.

• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder beltrest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, thenreturn to the booster seat.

• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return tothe booster seat.

• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained forlength of trip? If yes, continue. If no, return tothe booster seat.

If you have the choice, a child should sit in a positionwith a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint ashoulder belt can provide.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder belt canprovide. The shoulder belt should not cross the faceor neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,just touching the top of the thighs. This applies beltforce to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It shouldnever be worn over the abdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children and infants aresafer when properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strikeother people who are buckled up, or can be thrownout of the vehicle. Older children need to use safetybelts properly.

1-29

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wear the same safetybelt. The safety belt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two children can becrushed together and seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only one person at a time.

1-30

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with theshoulder belt behind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulderbelt properly. In a crash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt. The child couldmove too far forward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The child might also slideunder the lap belt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and across the chest.

1-31

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! This includesinfants and all other children. Neither the distancetraveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, thelaw in every state in the United States and in everyCanadian province says children up to some age mustbe restrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured or strangled if ashoulder belt is wrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues to tighten. Never leavechildren unattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adultsand older children, but not for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Every time infants andyoung children ride in vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriate child restraints.

Children who are not restrained properly can strike otherpeople, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

1-32

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a child while riding in avehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is not possible to hold itduring a crash. For example, in a crash at only25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on aperson’s arms. An infant should be secured in anappropriate restraint.

1-33

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Children who are up against, or very close to, anyairbag when it inflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in theright front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraintin a rear seat. It is also better to secure aforward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facing child restraint in theright front seat, always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go.

Q: What are the different types of add-on childrestraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by thevehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.Selection of a particular restraint should take intoconsideration not only the child’s weight, height,and age but also whether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motor vehicle in which it willbe used.

1-34

For most basic types of child restraints, there aremany different models available. When purchasing achild restraint, be sure it is designed to be usedin a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have alabel saying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that comewith the restraint state the weight and heightlimitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,there are many kinds of restraints available forchildren with special needs.

{CAUTION:

To reduce the risk of neck and head injury duringa crash, infants need complete support. This isbecause an infant’s neck is not fully developedand its head weighs so much compared with therest of its body. In a crash, an infant in arear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, the back andshoulders. Infants should always be secured inrear-facing child restraints.

{CAUTION:

A young child’s hip bones are still so small thatthe vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remainlow on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it maysettle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,young children should always be secured inappropriate child restraints.

1-35

Child Restraint Systems

A rear-facing infantseat (A) provides restraintwith the seating surfaceagainst the back ofthe infant.

The harness system holds the infant in place and, in acrash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing childseat (B) provides restraintfor the child’s body with theharness.

A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed toimprove the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a child to see out thewindow.

1-36

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crashif the child restraint is not properly secured in thevehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in thevehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt, followingthe instructions that came with that child restraintand the instructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraintmust be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systemsmust be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or thelap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt. A child canbe endangered in a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to theinstructions that come with the restraint which may beon the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to thismanual. The child restraint instructions are important, soif they are not available, obtain a replacement copy fromthe manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secureany child restraint in your vehicle — even when no childis in it.

1-37

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraint

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crashif the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the child properly following theinstructions that came with that child restraint.

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer if theyare restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.

We recommend that children and child restraintsbe secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding ina forward-facing child seat; an older child riding ina booster seat; and children, who are large enough,using safety belts.

Air Suspension Seats

{CAUTION:

A child restraint cannot be secured properly in anair-suspension type seat. This is because anair-suspension seat is designed to move up anddown for an adult passenger. Do not use a childrestraint in an air-suspension seat.

If your vehicle is a regular cab model with anair-suspension seat in the right front passenger’sposition, there is no place in your vehicle to secure achild restraint. The only answer is to have infantsand young children make the trip in another vehicle,where they can get the protection they need.

Bucket or Bench SeatsIf your vehicle is a regular cab model with a bucket orbench seat in the right front passenger’s position,the child restraint must be secured properly.If your vehicle has airbags and you need to secure achild restraint in the right front passenger’s seat, there isa switch on the instrument panel that you can use toturn off the passenger’s airbag. See Airbag Off Switchon page 1-55 and Securing a Child Restraint in the RightFront Seat Position on page 1-44 for more on this,including important safety information.

1-38

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facingchild seat in the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right front passengerairbag inflates. This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger airbag inflates and the passengerseat is in a forward position.

Even if the airbag switch has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, no system isfail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag willnot deploy under some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off.

CAUTION: (Continued)


Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,even if the airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to secure the child restraintin a rear seat.

When securing a child restraint in a rear seatingposition, study the instructions that came with your childrestraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secureany child restraint in your vehicle — even whenno child is in it.

1-39

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)Some child restraints have a LATCH system. As part ofthe LATCH system, your child restraint may havelower attachments and/or a top tether. The LATCHsystem can help hold the child restraint in place duringdriving or in a crash. Some vehicles have lowerand/or top tether anchors designed to secure a childrestraint with lower attachments and/or a top tether.Some child restraints with a top tether are designed tobe used whether the top tether is anchored or not.Other child restraints require that the top tetherbe anchored. A national or local law may require thatthe top tether be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing childrestraints have a top tether, and that the tether beattached.Your vehicle does not have lower anchors or top tetheranchors to secure a child restraint with the LATCHsystem. If a national or local law requires that your toptether be anchored, do not use a child restraint in thisvehicle because a top tether cannot be properlyanchored. You must use the safety belts to secure yourchild restraint in this vehicle, unless a national or local lawrequires that the top tether be anchored. Refer to yourchild restraint instructions and instructions in this manualfor securing a child restraint using the vehicle’s safetybelts.

Securing a Child Restraint in a RearOutside Seat Position (Crew Cab)When securing a child restraint in a rear seatingposition, study the instructions that came with your childrestraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.

Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a toptether anchor if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored, or if the instructionsthat come with the child restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing childrestraints have a top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If you need to install more than one child restraint in therear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restrainton page 1-38.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

1-40

3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Make sure the release button is positioned so youwould be able to unbuckle the safety belt quicklyif necessary.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.

1-41

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten thelap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulderbelt back into the retractor. If you are using aforward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpfulto use your knee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

6. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way.

Securing a Child Restraint inthe Center Rear Seat Position(Crew Cab)This vehicle does not have top tether anchors. Somenational or local laws require that top tethers beanchored. In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints have a top tether, andthat the tether be attached.

Be sure to follow the instructions that came with thechild restraint. Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

You will be using the lap belt.

1-42

1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latchplate and pulling it along the belt.


3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around therestraint. The child restraint instructions will showyou how.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Make sure the release button is positioned so youwould be able to unbuckle the safety belt quicklyif necessary.

5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you pushdown on the child restraint. If you are using aforward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpfulto use your knee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.


To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt.

1-43

Securing a Child Restraint in theCenter Front Seat Position

{CAUTION:

A child in a child restraint in the center front seatcan be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbagsif they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in thecenter front seat if your vehicle has airbags or if itinterferes with shifting gears. It is always better tosecure a child restraint in a rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in the center front seatposition if your vehicle has airbags. If your vehicle doesnot have airbags, use the instructions for Securing aChild Restraint in the Center Rear Seat Position (CrewCab) on page 1-42 to install a child restraint in thecenter front position.

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionThis vehicle may have airbags. A rear seat is a saferplace to secure a forward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint on page 1-38.

There may be a switch on the instrument panel that youcan use to turn off the right front passenger frontalairbag. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-55 for more onthis, including important safety information.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facingchild seat in the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

1-44

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This is because theback of the rear-facing child restraint would bevery close to the inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right front passenger airbaginflates and the passenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the airbag switch has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, no system isfail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag willnot deploy under some unusual circumstance,even though it is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,even if the airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to secure the child restraintin a rear seat.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light ever comes on whenyou have turned off the airbag, it means thatsomething may be wrong with the airbag system.The right front passenger’s airbag could inflateeven though the switch is off. If this ever happens,do not let anyone whom the national governmenthas identified as a member of a passenger airbagrisk group sit in the right front passenger’s position(for example, do not secure a rear-facing childrestraint in the right front passenger’s seat) untilyou have your vehicle serviced. See Airbag OffSwitch on page 1-55 and Airbag Readiness Lighton page 3-27 for more on this, including importantsafety information.

If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facingchild restraint should not be installed in the vehicle,even if the airbag is off.

1-45

Do not secure a child restraint in a position without atop tether anchor if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored, or if the instructions thatcome with the child restraint say that the top strap mustbe anchored.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing childrestraints have a top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as it will go beforesecuring the forward-facing child restraint.If you have no other choice but to install a rear-facingchild restraint in this seat, make sure the airbag is offonce the child restraint has been installed.When the airbag off switch has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator in theairbag off light should light and stay lit when you startthe vehicle. See Airbag Off Light on page 3-28.


3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulderportions of the vehicle’s safety belt through oraround the restraint. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.Position the release button on the buckle so thatthe safety belt could be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

1-46

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock.

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lapportion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installing a forward-facingchild restraint, it may be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the child restraint as you tightenthe belt.


To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safetybelt and let it return to the stowed position. If the toptether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.

1-47

If you turned the airbag off with the switch, turn on theright front passenger airbag when you remove thechild restraint from the vehicle unless the person whowill be sitting there is a member of a passengerairbag risk group. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-55for more information, including important safetyinformation.

{CAUTION:

If the right front passenger’s airbag is turned offfor a person who is not in a risk group identifiedby the national government, that person will nothave the extra protection of an airbag. In a crash,the airbag will not be able to inflate and helpprotect the person sitting there.

Do not turn off the passenger’s airbag unless theperson sitting there is in a risk group identified bythe national government. See Airbag Off Switch onpage 1-55 for more on this, including importantsafety information.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle may have the following airbags:

• A frontal airbag for the driver.

• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.

For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on themiddle part of the steering wheel for the driver andon the instrument panel for the right front passenger.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbagsare also designed to help reduce the risk of injuryfrom the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

1-48

Here are the most important things to know about theairbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in a crash ifyou are not wearing your safety belt — even if youhave airbags. Airbags are designed to work withsafety belts, but do not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash.In some crashes safety belts are your onlyrestraint. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? onpage 1-52.

Wearing your safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting things inside thevehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

{CAUTION:

Airbags inflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to the airbag, as you would be if you weresitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.Safety belts help keep you in position before andduring a crash. Always wear your safety belt, evenwith airbags. The driver should sit as far back aspossible while still maintaining control of thevehicle.

1-49

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to, anyairbag when it inflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young children and infantsneed the protection that a child restraint systemcan provide. Always secure children properly inyour vehicle. To read how, see Older Children onpage 1-28 or Infants and Young Children onpage 1-32.

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows the airbagsymbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-27for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the steeringwheel.

1-50

The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrumentpanel on the passenger’s side.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and anairbag, the bag might not inflate properly or itmight force the object into that person causingsevere injury or even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not putanything between an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on the steeringwheel hub or on or near any other airbagcovering.

1-51

When Should an Airbag Inflate?Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce thepotential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or rightfront passenger’s head and chest. However, they are onlydesigned to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermineddeployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are usedto predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants.

Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is notbased on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It dependslargely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,and how quickly your vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbagscould inflate at a different crash speed than if thevehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speed thanif the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straight into the object.

1-52

Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether anairbag should have inflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costswere. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined bywhat the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In a deployment event, the sensing system sends anelectrical signal triggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing thebag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator, theairbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbagmodule.

Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steeringwheel and instrument panel.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,even belted occupants can contact the steering wheelor the instrument panel. In moderate to severe sidecollisions, even belted occupants can contact the insideof the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protection provided by safetybelts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impactmore evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually.

But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,primarily because the occupant’s motion is not towardthose airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? onpage 1-52 for more information.

Airbags should never be regarded as anything morethan a supplement to safety belts.

1-53

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After a frontal airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, soquickly that some people may not even realize the airbaginflated. Some components of the airbag module may behot for several minutes. For location of the airbagmodules, see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? onpage 1-53.

The parts of the airbag that come into contact with youmay be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may besome smoke and dust coming from the vents in thedeflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent thedriver from seeing out of the windshield or being able tosteer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leavingthe vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in theair. This dust could cause breathing problems forpeople with a history of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicleshould get out as soon as it is safe to do so. Ifyou have breathing problems but cannot get out ofthe vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get freshair by opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems following an airbagdeployment, you should seek medical attention.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage may also occur from theright front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After anairbag inflates, you will need some new parts forthe airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbagsystem will not be there to help protect you inanother crash. A new system will include airbagmodules and possibly other parts. The servicemanual for your vehicle covers the need to replaceother parts.

1-54

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnosticmodule which records information after acrash. See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy(Isuzu 7.8L L6 Engine) on page 7-11 and EventData Recorders (Isuzu 7.8L L6 Engine) onpage 7-12.

• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbagsystem. Improper service can mean that anairbag system will not work properly. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

Airbag Off Switch

If the vehicle has a rightfront passenger airbag,it has an airbag on-offswitch that you can use tomanually turn on or off theright front passengerairbag.

This switch should only be turned to the off position ifthe person in the right front passenger position is amember of a passenger risk group identified bythe national government as follows:

Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) mustride in the front seat because:• My vehicle has no rear seat;

• My vehicle has a rear seat too small toaccommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or

• The infant has a medical condition which, accordingto the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for theinfant to ride in the front seat so that the drivercan constantly monitor the child’s condition.

Child Age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 mustride in the front seat because:• My vehicle has no rear seat;

• Although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rearseat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to 12sometimes must ride in the front because no spaceis available in the rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or

• The child has a medical condition which, accordingto the child’s physician, makes it necessary for thechild to ride in the front seat so that the drivercan constantly monitor the child’s condition.

1-55

Medical Condition. A passenger has amedical condition which, according to his orher physician:• Causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk

for the passenger; and

• Makes the potential harm from the passengerairbag in a crash greater than the potentialharm from turning off the airbag and allowing thepassenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboardor windshield in a crash.

{CAUTION:

If the right front passenger’s airbag is turned offfor a person who is not in a risk group identifiedby the national government, that person will nothave the extra protection of an airbag. In a crash,the airbag will not be able to inflate and helpprotect the person sitting there. Do not turn off thepassenger’s airbag unless the person sitting thereis in a risk group.

To turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag,insert your ignition key intothe switch, push in, andmove the switch to the offposition.

The airbag off light will come on and stay on to let youknow that the right front passenger airbag is off.See Airbag Off Light on page 3-28. The airbag off lightwill stay on to remind you that the airbag is off. Theright front passenger’s airbag will remain off untilyou turn it back on again.

1-56

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light ever comes on andstays on, it means that something may be wrongwith the airbag system. For example, the rightfront passenger airbag could inflate even thoughthe airbag on-off switch is turned off.

To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have thevehicle serviced right away. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 3-27 for more information, includingimportant safety information.

To turn the right frontpassenger airbag onagain, insert the ignitionkey into the switch,push in, and move theswitch to the on position.

The right front passenger frontal airbag is now enabled(may inflate). See Airbag Off Light on page 3-28 formore information.

1-57

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.There are parts of the airbag system in several placesaround the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and theservice manual have information about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a servicemanual, see Service Publications Ordering Informationon page 7-10.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned offand the battery is disconnected, an airbag can stillinflate during improper service. You can be injuredif you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to follow proper serviceprocedures, and make sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to or changeabout the vehicle that could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’sframe, bumper system, height, front end or sidesheet metal, they may keep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing or moving any partsof the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrumentpanel, front sensors, or airbag wiring can affectthe operation of the airbag system.

If you have any questions about this, you shouldcontact Customer Assistance before you modifyyour vehicle. The phone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are in Step Two ofthe Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.

1-58

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get myvehicle modified. How can I find out whetherthis will affect my airbag system?

A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.The phone numbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual. SeeCustomer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.

In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manualhave information about the location of the airbag sensors,sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint Systems

Safety BeltsNow and then, check the safety belt reminder light,safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.

Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts that might keep a safety belt system from doingits job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a beltis torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. SeeSafety Belt Reminders on page 3-26 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of SafetyBelts on page 5-89.

AirbagsThe airbag system does not need regularly scheduledmaintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 3-27 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Donot open or break the airbag coverings. If there areany opened or broken airbag covers, have theairbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. Forthe location of the airbag modules, see WhatMakes an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-53. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

1-59

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systems in yourvehicle. A damaged restraint system may notproperly protect the person using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in a crash. To helpmake sure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have them inspected andany necessary replacements made as soon aspossible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts?

After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.But the belt assemblies that were used during any crashmay have been stressed or damaged. See yourdealer/retailer to have your safety belt assembliesinspected or replaced.

New parts and repairs may be necessary even if thebelt was not being used at the time of the crash.

If an airbag inflates, if your vehicle has these, you willneed to replace airbag system parts. See the part on theairbag system earlier in this section.

1-60

Keys ...............................................................2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ................2-3Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

Operation ...................................................2-4Doors and Locks .............................................2-6

Door Locks ....................................................2-6Power Door Locks ..........................................2-7

Windows .........................................................2-8Manual Windows ............................................2-9Power Windows .............................................2-9Sliding Rear Window .......................................2-9Sun Visors ....................................................2-9

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-10New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-10Ignition Positions ..........................................2-11Engine Starter Over-Crank Protection ..............2-12Starting the Gasoline Engine ..........................2-12Starting the Diesel Engine ..............................2-14Engine Alarm and Automatic Shutdown ............2-18Idle Shutdown ..............................................2-19High Idle System ..........................................2-20Exhaust Restrictor (Engine Warm-Up) ..............2-22Engine Checks Before Operating ....................2-23Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-25

Diesel Engine Exhaust Brake .........................2-26Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-27Manual Transmission Operation ......................2-28Power Take-Off (PTO) ...................................2-30Four-Wheel Drive ..........................................2-30Parking .......................................................2-35Two-Speed Rear Axle ...................................2-36Parking Brake (With Hydraulic Brakes) .............2-38Parking Brake (With Air Brakes) ......................2-41Parking Brake Burnish Procedure ....................2-43Air Suspension .............................................2-44Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-44Engine Exhaust ............................................2-45Diesel Particulate Filter ..................................2-46Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................2-50

Mirrors ...........................................................2-51Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-51Outside Manual Mirrors ..................................2-51Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-51Outside Convex Mirrors .................................2-52Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-52

Storage Areas ................................................2-53Center Console Storage .................................2-53

Section 2 Features and Controls

2-1

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition keyis dangerous for many reasons, children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed. They couldoperate the power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. The windows willfunction with the keys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

Your vehicle has one double-sided key for the ignitionand all door locks.

If you ever lose your key, your dealer/retailer will beable to assist you with obtaining a new one.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.Be sure you have spare keys.

If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, callRoadside Assistance Center. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 7-5.

2-2

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemIf this vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)system, it operates on a radio frequency subjectto Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rulesand with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received,including interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by other thanan authorized service facility could void authorization touse this equipment.

If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,try this:

• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too farfrom the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy orsnowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects maybe blocking the signal. Take a few steps to theleft or right, hold the transmitter higher, andtry again.

• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “BatteryReplacement” later in this section.

• If the transmitter is still not working correctly, seeyour dealer/retailer or a qualified technician forservice.

2-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationFor vehicles with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System, transmitter functions work up to 30 feet (9 m)away from the vehicle.

LOCK: Press to lock all the doors.

UNLOCK: Press once to unlock the driver door.

Press this button again within five seconds to unlock allthe doors. The interior dome lamp comes on for about40 seconds or until the ignition switch is activated.

Programming Transmitters to theVehicleOnly RKE transmitters programmed to the vehiclewill work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacementcan be purchased and programmed through yourdealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter isprogrammed to the vehicle, all remaining transmittersmust also be programmed. Any lost or stolen transmittersno longer work once the new transmitter is programmed.Each vehicle can have up to four transmittersprogrammed to it.

Battery Replacement

Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touchany of the circuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damage the transmitter.

2-4

1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin objectinserted into the slot near the key ring hole.

2. Remove the battery.

3. Insert the new battery, positive (+) side down.Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Align the transmitter back together.

5. Check the operation of the transmitter. If thetransmitter does not work after battery replacement,it may need to be resynchronized to the vehicle.See Resynchronization following.

ResynchronizationResynchronization may be necessary due to thesecurity method used by this system. The transmitterdoes not send the same signal twice to the receiver. Thereceiver will not respond to a signal it has been sentpreviously. This prevents anyone from recordingand playing back the signal from the transmitter.

To resynchronize the transmitter, stand close to thevehicle and simultaneously press and hold the LOCKand UNLOCK buttons on the transmitter for at leastfive seconds. The door locks should cycle to confirmresynchronization. If the locks do not cycle, seeyour dealer/retailer for service.

2-5

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can easily

open the doors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door is locked, the handlewill not open it. You increase the chance ofbeing thrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wear safetybelts properly and lock the doors wheneveryou drive.



• Young children who get into unlocked vehiclesmay be unable to get out. A child can beovercome by extreme heat and can sufferpermanent injuries or even death from heatstroke. Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow down or stopyour vehicle. Locking your doors can helpprevent this from happening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.

On a vehicle equipped with keyless entry, you canuse your transmitter to lock or unlock your vehicle. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2-4.

To lock or unlock the door from the outside, use the key.

2-6

To lock the door from theinside, slide the manuallever on the door down.To unlock the door,slide the manual lever up.

Power Door Locks

If your vehicle has powerdoor locks, press thebottom of the power doorlock switch to lock all thedoors at once. To unlock allthe doors at once, pressthe top of the power doorlock switch.

When a door is locked, the inside door handle willnot work.

2-7

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in avehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by the extreme heat andsuffer permanent injuries or even death from heatstroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.

2-8

Manual WindowsTurn the hand crank on each door to raise or lower thewindow.

Power WindowsIf your vehicle has power windows, the switches for allwindows are located on the driver’s door. In addition,each passenger door has a switch for their own window.

Press the rearward part of the switch to lower the window.Press the forward part of the switch to raise the window.The power windows will operate when the ignition is inACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.

Express-DownThe driver’s window has an express-down feature.This allows the window to be lowered fully withoutcontinuously holding the switch. Press the switch downfully to initiate the express-down feature. Press thetop of the switch to stop the window from lowering.

Window Lockout (Crew Cab)

o (Window Lockout): The driver’s window switchesinclude a lockout feature. This prevents the passenger’sfrom operating their windows. The driver can stilloperate all windows with the lockout on. Press thebutton to turn the lockout feature on and off.

Sliding Rear WindowTo open the sliding rear window, pull the latch towardthe driver’s side of the vehicle.To close the window, slide the window toward thepassenger’s side of the vehicle. The latch willautomatically lock into place. Try to open the windowwithout releasing the latch to be sure the windowis in the locked position.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, you can swing down the visors. Youcan also swing them out to block glare from the side.

Regular Cab Switches

Crew Cab Switches

2-9

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does not need an elaboratebreak-in. But it will perform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

• Let the engine warm up before you operate yourvehicle under load.

• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less forthe first 500 miles (805 km).

• Do not drive at any one speed, fast or slow, forthe first 500 miles (805 km). Do not makefull-throttle starts.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles(322 km) or so. During this time the new brakelinings are not yet broken in. Hard stopswith new linings can mean premature wear andearlier replacement. Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you get new brake linings.

• Use the lowest gear you can when you start aloaded vehicle in motion and when going uphills to avoid overloading the engine.

• Check and adjust engine and transmission fluidlevels often and be sure tires are properlyinflated for the load you are carrying.

• When new, parking brake linings have not yetbeen broken in. When linings are new, it ispossible that the vehicle could move while theparking brake is applied. Before using theparking brake on grades, follow the parkingbrake burnish procedure. See Parking BrakeBurnish Procedure on page 2-43.

• If you have a Caterpillar® diesel engine, see theCaterpillar® Diesel Engine Operation andMaintenance Manual.

2-10

Ignition PositionsThe ignition switch has five different positions.

A (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position allows you to usethe radio, power windows and the windshield wiperswhen the engine is off. To get into ACC/ACCESSORY,push in the key and turn it toward you. The steeringwheel will remain locked, just as it was before youinserted the key.

B (LOCK): This position locks the ignition, steeringwheel and transmission. You will only be able to removethe key when the ignition is turned to LOCK.

C (OFF): This position turns off the engine, but leavesthe steering wheel unlocked. Use OFF if you musthave the vehicle in motion while the engine is off.

D (ON/RUN): This position can be used to operate theelectrical accessories and to display some instrumentpanel cluster warning and indicator lights. Theswitch stays in this position when the engine is running.

If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN position with the engine off, the battery couldbe drained. You may not be able to start the vehicleif the battery is allowed to drain for an extended periodof time.

E (START): This is the position that starts the engine.When the engine starts, release the key. The ignitionswitch returns to ON/RUN for driving.

A warning tone will sound when the driver door isopened, the vehicle is parked, and the key is in theignition.

2-11

Engine Starter Over-CrankProtectionThe vehicle may have an engine starter over-crankprotection system. If the starter motor overheats andshuts off due to over-cranking, the motor must cool downbefore it will reset and allow starter operation. It can takeup to six minutes before the starter will work again.

Starting the Gasoline EngineThe 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)shows the code letter for the engine. Use this numberto verify the type of engine in the vehicle. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) on page 5-94. Followthe proper steps to start the engine.

To start a diesel engine, see Starting the Diesel Engineon page 2-14.

Automatic TransmissionSet the parking brake and move the shifter to N (Neutral)or P (Park), if so equipped. The engine will not start inany other position.

Manual TransmissionSet the parking brake, shift to N (Neutral) and hold theclutch pedal to the floor while starting the engine.

Starter Motor Operation• The starter motor will disengage if you release the

key or the engine reaches a predetermined enginespeed.

• To prevent overheating, the starter motor willdisengage after continuously operating for15 seconds. You must release the key from thestart position to re-engage the starter.

• The starter motor will not engage if the engine isalready running.

• The starter motor will disengage if, aftertwo seconds, the starter pinion gear does notengage the flywheel or there is no engine rpmsignal from the engine speed sensor.

2-12

Starting the Engine1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn the

ignition key to START. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as theengine gets warm.

2. If the engine does not start in 10 seconds, push theaccelerator pedal all the way down and crank theengine for five more seconds, unless it starts sooner.

3. If the engine still will not start, or starts but thenstops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.Wait 15 seconds to let the starter motor cool down.Do Steps 1 through 3 again.When the engine starts, let go of the key and theaccelerator pedal.

Notice: The engine is designed to work with theelectronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could change the way theengine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, theengine might not perform properly. Any resultingdamage would not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

If you ever need to have the vehicle towed, see TowingYour Vehicle on page 4-23.

Gasoline Engine Warm-UpWhen the engine starts, let it run for 20 or 30 secondsto warm up before putting a load on it.

Drive at moderate speeds for the first 2 to 3 miles(3.2 to 4.8 km), especially in cold weather. See HighIdle System on page 2-20.

Restarting the Gasoline Engine WhileMoving (Automatic Transmission)If you have to restart the engine while the vehicle ismoving, shift to N (Neutral).

Stopping the Gasoline EngineLet the engine idle for a few seconds before turning itoff after you have finished driving the vehicle.

If you shift to N (Neutral) or P (Park), set the parkingbrake.

If the vehicle has a two-speed axle, put the rangeselector in low. To be sure the axle has shifted into low,engage the clutch and transmission; the vehicle maymove slightly when you do this.

While the engine is idling and before you turn it off, youcan make a list of any operational or handling concerns togive to responsible maintenance personnel so they canhandle them right away.

2-13

Moisture will condense in a fuel tank that is almostempty if the engine has not run for a while, even justovernight under some conditions. So, it is always best torefuel the vehicle at the end of each run.

Starting the Diesel EngineThe vehicle’s diesel engine starts differently than agasoline engine. Read the following pages to learn howto start, restart, warm-up, and stop the diesel engine.

The information applies to Caterpillar® Diesel Engine,6.6L DURAMAX® Diesel Engine, Isuzu 6H DieselEngine, unless otherwise noted.

If you have a Caterpillar® Diesel Engine, also refer tothe Caterpillar® Diesel Engine Operation & MaintenanceManual for the starting procedure.

Automatic TransmissionMove the shifter to P (Park) or N (Neutral). The enginewill not start in any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is already moving, useN (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, you could damagethe transmission. Shift to P (Park) only whenthe vehicle is stopped.

Manual TransmissionMove the shift lever to N (Neutral) and hold the clutchpedal to the floor while starting the engine. The vehiclewill not start if the clutch pedal is not all the way down.

Starting the Engine1. Turn your ignition key to ON/RUN.

Observe the wait to start light. See Wait to StartLight on page 3-35. This light may not comeon if the engine is hot.If you have a Caterpillar® diesel engine, see yourCaterpillar® Diesel Engine Operation & MaintenanceManual for proper wait to start light operation.

2. As soon as the wait to start light goes off,immediately turn the ignition key to START.When the engine starts, let go of the key.If the vehicle is equipped with a DURAMAX®

6600 Diesel Engine, it has a fast warm-up glowplug system. The wait to start light will illuminate fora much shorter time than most diesel engines,due to the rapid heating of the glow plugs.

Notice: Holding the key in START for longer than15 seconds at a time will cause the battery tobe drained much sooner. And the excessive heatcan damage the starter motor.

2-14

Notice: If the wait to start light stays on afterstarting the vehicle, the vehicle may not runproperly. Have the vehicle serviced right away.

3. If the engine does not start after 15 secondsof cranking, turn the ignition key to OFF. Wait oneminute for the starter to cool, then try the samesteps again.

If you are trying to start the engine after you have runout of fuel, see Running Out of Fuel on page 5-17.

When the engine is cold, let it run for a few minutesbefore you move the vehicle. This lets oil pressure buildup. The engine will sound louder when it is cold.

Notice: If you are not in an idling vehicle and theengine overheats, you would not be there to see theoverheated engine indication. This could damagethe vehicle. Do not let the engine run when you arenot in the vehicle.

Cold Weather StartingIf the vehicle has the 6.6L DURAMAX® Diesel Engine orthe Isuzu 6H Diesel Engine, the following notice applies:

Notice: The diesel engine has an electric air intakeheater system which reduces white smoke andhelps start the engine in cold weather. Do not spraystarting fluid into the air intake where it cancontact the heater elements.

If you do not have the GM Automatic Ether InjectionSystem, do not use starting fluid or you coulddamage the engine. If you have the GM system, useonly GM approved starting fluid that has been testedto establish compatibility with the air inlet heatersystem.

The following tips will help with engine starting in coldweather.

• Use the recommended engine oil when the outsidetemperature drops below freezing. See Engine Oil(DURAMAX Diesel Engine) on page 5-24 orEngine Oil (Caterpillar Diesel Engine) on page 5-27or Engine Oil (Isuzu Diesel Engine) on page 5-28or Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on page 5-32.When the outside temperature drops below0°F (−18°C), use of the optional engine coolantheater is recommended.

• If you experience longer cranking times, notice anunusual amount of exhaust smoke or are athigher altitudes (over 7,000 ft. or 2 135 m), you mayuse the optional engine coolant heater. SeeEngine Coolant Heater on page 2-25.

• See What Fuel to Use on page 5-8 for informationon what fuel to use in cold weather.

2-15

Cold Weather Starting (Caterpillar®

Diesel)Because the diesel engine uses compression ignition, itis harder to start in cold weather than a gasoline engine.The air intake heater, use of the proper engine oil,optional engine coolant heater and optional etherinjection system help cold weather starting. See theCaterpillar® Diesel Engine Operation & MaintenanceManual for more information.

Restarting the Diesel Engine WhileMoving (Automatic Transmission)If you have to restart the engine while the vehicle ismoving, shift to N (Neutral).

Stopping the Diesel Engine1. Apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake (With

Hydraulic Brakes) on page 2-38 or Parking Brake(With Air Brakes) on page 2-41 for parkingbrake apply procedure.

2. Shift into N (Neutral) for a manual transmission orP (Park) for an automatic transmission.

3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.If the vehicle has a two-speed axle, see Two-SpeedRear Axle on page 2-36.

If you have a Caterpillar® diesel engine, see theCaterpillar® Diesel Engine Operation & MaintenanceManual for additional information.

Diesel Engine Warm-UpSeveral factors affect how quickly the diesel enginewarms up. These can include outside temperature,engine load, idle time and the vehicle’s option content.The vehicle may be equipped with some featuresthat can help the engine reach operating temperaturesooner. Some of these features are discussed below.

Also, remember that an automatic transmissionadds heat to the cooling system through the heatexchanger in the radiator. Because of this, vehiclesequipped with automatic transmissions are often able toretain engine coolant heat better than manualtransmission vehicles.

See the Caterpillar® Operation & Maintenance manualfor additional diesel engine warm-up information.

2-16

If the Diesel Engine Will Not StartIf you have run out of fuel, see Running Out of Fuel onpage 5-17.

If you are not out of fuel, and the engine will not start,do this:

Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN. Immediately after thewait to start light goes off, turn the ignition key to START.

If the light does not go off, wait a few seconds, then trystarting the engine again. And, see your dealer/retaileras soon as you can for a starting system check.

If the light comes on and then goes off and you knowthe batteries are charged, but the engine still willnot start, the vehicle needs service.

If the light does not come on when the engine is cold,the vehicle needs service.

If the batteries do not have enough charge to start theengine, see Battery on page 5-61.

Be sure you have the right oil for the engine, and thatyou have changed the oil at the proper times. If you usethe wrong oil, the engine may be harder to start.

Be sure you are using the proper fuel for existingweather conditions. See What Fuel to Use on page 5-8.

If the engine starts, runs a short time, then stops, thevehicle needs service.

{CAUTION:

Do not use gasoline or starting aids, such asether, in the air intake. They could damage theengine. There could also be a fire, which couldcause serious personal injury.

2-17

Engine Alarm and AutomaticShutdownThe check gages warning light will come on if thesystem senses high engine temperature, and a low orhigh engine oil pressure. If high engine temperature,low engine oil pressure or high engine oil pressureis detected, you will hear a tone alarm at two beats persecond. The alarm and the light will remain on untilthe condition is fixed. If the engine temperature or oilpressure condition worsens, the tone alarm will go tofive beats per second.

If the system senses low engine coolant, the five beatper second alarm and the low coolant warning lightwill come on.

The five beats per second tone alarm means that theengine will shut down in about 25 to 30 seconds. Thereis also an engine shutdown light to indicate that theengine will shut down. See Engine Shutdown WarningLight on page 3-40.

Pull off the road and shut off the engine. Do not start ituntil the reason for the problem is known, and theproblem is fixed. If the engine shuts down when you arestill in traffic, you can restart the engine and get another

25 to 30 seconds of operation. Do this only if you have to,since there is a problem that can harm the engine if it isnot fixed. Engine automatic shutdown, for gasolineengines, requires activation by your dealer/retailer.

Notice: If you try to operate the vehicle after theengine automatically shuts down, you may damagethe vehicle. Have the vehicle repaired as soon aspossible.

Ambulance, Fire, and Rescue PackagesThe check gages warning light will come on if thesystem senses high engine temperature or low engineoil pressure. If high engine temperature or low engine oilpressure is detected, you will also hear a tone alarmat two beats per second. The alarm and the lightwill remain on until the condition is fixed. If the enginetemperature or oil pressure condition worsens, thetone alarm will go to five beats per second.

If the system senses low engine coolant, the five beatper second alarm and the low coolant warning lightwill come on.

The engine will not shutdown, but you should have thevehicle checked as soon as you can. See CheckGages Warning Light on page 3-43 for more information.

2-18

Idle ShutdownIf the vehicle has a diesel engine it could have anengine idle shutdown feature.

This feature automatically shuts down the engine after itidles continuously for five minutes and if the followingconditions are met:

• The parking brake is set.

• The vehicle is at a complete stop.

• The automatic transmission is in N (Neutral) orP (Park).

If the parking brake is not engaged, then the engineshuts down after 15 minutes of continuous idlingoperation.

The driver can reset the engine shutdown timer bymomentarily changing the position of the accelerator,brake, or clutch pedal or by shifting the transmission outof P (Park) or N (Neutral). Once reset, the engine idleshutdown will restart the shutdown sequence describedabove, and will continue to do so until the engineshuts down or the vehicle is driven.

The engine will not go into idle shutdown mode if:

• The Power Take-Off (PTO) equipment is operating.See Power Take-Off (PTO) on page 2-30 for moreinformation.

• The engine coolant temperature is below 60°F.The engine idle shutdown will be activated oncethe vehicle coolant reaches 60°F or above.

• The Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) is in regenerationmode and the green DPF lamp is illuminated tonotify the driver that DPF is regenerating. Theengine idle shutdown mode will be overridden forthe time necessary to complete the regenerationprocess, up to a maximum of 30 minutes.

• Service or maintenance is being performed on theengine. The engine idle shutdown mode may bedeactivated, by using a diagnostic scan tool,for a period of up to a maximum of 60 minutes.

2-19

The ENGINE SHUTDOWN WARNING LIGHT will comeon and a continuous chime will alert the driver30 seconds before the engine goes into idle shutdownmode. The engine shutdown warning light and chime willstay on for the entire duration of the idle shutdownevent to inform the driver that the engine is in idleshutdown mode. See Engine Shutdown Warning Lighton page 3-40 for more information.

After the engine shutdown occurs, the engine is nolonger running, and the ignition is still in the ON/RUNposition, all accessories can be used. Turn the ignitionswitch to START to restart the engine or turn it toLOCK or OFF to prevent the battery from draining.

High Idle System

High Idle System with Switch

If the vehicle has thisfeature, the manual highidle switch is located in theinstrument panelswitchbank.

2-20

This system can be used to increase the engine idlespeed whenever the following conditions are met:

• The brake pedal is not pressed.

• The vehicle is at a complete stop for vehicles withdiesel engines. The vehicle must not be movingand the accelerator must not be pressed for vehicleswith gasoline engines.

• If the vehicle has manual transmission the clutchpedal is not pressed or, if the vehicle has theautomatic transmission it is in N (Neutral) orP (Park).

The manual high idle feature is activated by pressingthe switch on the instrument panel. When the switch ispressed again, or any of the previous conditions arenot met, manual high idle will be deactivated.

The manual high idle has been preset at the factory.Your dealer/retailer may change the setting to fityour needs.

For vehicles with Caterpillar® diesel engines, the highidle switch can be used to set any desired high idlespeed.

To set a new temporary engine idle speed do thefollowing:

1. Make sure all of the previously described conditionsare met.

2. Press the accelerator pedal to the desired enginespeed.

3. Momentarily press the manual high idle switch.

The temporary high idle speed will be set. This new highidle rpm level will be remembered by the system untileither the ignition is turned to OFF or a new highidle speed is set.

Automatic High Idle SystemThe automatic high idle feature will engage wheneveryou start the vehicle and the engine is below the presetoperating temperature. This will help decrease enginewarm-up time.

On vehicles that have the Caterpillar® diesel engine youmay have an exhaust restrictor that will operate inHigh Idle mode. The exhaust brake switch must be onfor this feature to operate. See Diesel Engine ExhaustBrake on page 2-26 for more information.

Idle speed will then return to normal when the enginereaches the preset operating temperature or hasbeen operating for at least 10 minutes.

2-21

Exhaust Restrictor (EngineWarm-Up)

Exhaust RestrictorIf the vehicle has a Isuzu 6H Diesel Engine, it may havea feature called an Exhaust Restrictor (NPE), whichuses an air actuated valve in the exhaust systemto restrict exhaust gas flow which enhances the engineand heater warm-up.

Automatic Quick Warm-UpIf the vehicle has a DURAMAX® 6600 engine, it has afeature called an Automatic Quick Warm-Up, which usesthe turbocharger to restrict the exhaust gas flowwhich enhances the engine and heater warm-up.

In both systems, exhaust restrictor or automatic quickwarm-up, the cold temperature high idle feature elevatesthe engines idle speed, up to 1500 rpm, and restrictsthe exhaust gas flow, when outside temperaturesare below 50°F (10°C), and the engine coolanttemperature is below certain levels. This featureenhances heater performance by raising the enginecoolant temperature faster.

For all engines this feature is already turned on. Theautomatic quick warm-up on the DURAMAX® enginecan be turned off and on by doing the followingprocedure:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with the vehicle off.

2. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor andhold it while quickly pressing and fully releasing thebrake pedal three times in less than eight seconds.

3. Release the accelerator pedal and start the engine.The green exhaust brake/restrictor light below theradio controls will be lit for 10 seconds.If this feature is turned off, by doing the proceduredescribed previously, and then the engine isstarted, the exhaust brake/restrictor light will flashfor 10 seconds and then it will turn off.

When the engine is started, it will slowly increase to thehigh idle speed after a delay of a few seconds; up toabout two minutes. For this method to work properlythere must be no throttle or brake pedal faults, and thethrottle pedal must not fall below 75 percent of wideopen throttle while pressing the brake pedal.

2-22

The engine idle speed will return to normal once thefollowing conditions are met:

• Once engine coolant temperature reaches about150°F (65°C).

• The intake temperature reaches a certain level.

The high idle speed will be temporarily interrupted andthe engine speed will return to normal if any of thefollowing conditions occur:

• The brake pedal is applied.

• The accelerator pedal is pressed.

• The automatic transmission is shifted out ofP (Park) or N (Neutral).

• The clutch pedal on the manual transmission ispressed.

• Vehicle speed is detected.

Once these conditions no longer exist, the engine idlespeed will slowly increase to high idle after thenormal delay, if the conditions for engine coolanttemperature and air intake temperature are still met.

Engine Checks Before OperatingWhen you have started the engine, let it run for20 to 30 seconds before you put a load on the engine.But do not leave the vehicle while the engine is running.

Avoid unnecessary idling of diesel engine equippedvehicles.

If the engine idles too long, the temperature of theengine coolant will fall below the normal operatingrange. Low engine operating temperature causesseveral conditions which affect engine operation andreduce engine life.

The engine should be permitted to go through awarm-up period. Operate the vehicle at a minimum of600 rpm during the warm-up period. During thisperiod and during operation, the following observationsshould be made.

2-23

During this warm-up period, check the warning lightsand gages:

• If oil pressure does not begin to rise within15 seconds of starting, stop the engine and find thecause. See Oil Pressure Gage on page 3-38 formore information.

• If the engine coolant temperature gage needle goesinto the hot area on the gage, stop the engine andfind the cause of the overheating. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gage on page 3-34 for moreinformation.

• If you have air brakes, the dual-needle air pressuregage should read at least 115 psi (790 kPa) for bothservice systems before you try to move the vehicle.When air pressure is below 60 psi (420 kPa), theLOW AIR light will come on and you will hear atone alarm. See Brake System Warning Light onpage 3-31 for more information. If the pressure doesnot build up or drops during warm-up, stop theengine and find the cause before you try to move thevehicle. Recommended air pressure before driving is120 psi (830 kPa). See Air Pressure Gage onpage 3-47 for more information.

• The charging system light should come on when theignition key is turned to ON/RUN or START andshould go out when the engine is running above idle.If the light does not go out or comes back on duringnormal engine operation, have the charging systemchecked right away. (This light tells you if thegenerator is not charging; it does not reflect thecondition of the battery.) See Charging System Lighton page 3-29 for more information.

• The voltmeter charge indicator gage tells you thecondition of the battery’s charge. The gage should bein the center area during engine operation. The redarea on the left indicates an undercharge condition;the red area on the right indicates an overcharge.If the gage is in either red area, have the battery andcharging system checked right away. See VoltmeterGage on page 3-30 for more information.

Notice: Do not allow the engine to operate at lowidle for more than five minutes. This can cause lowengine operating temperatures which can affectengine operation and reduce engine life. Engine idlespeed should be increased to 1200 rpm wheneverextended idle is required. Once started, the engineshould be placed under load to allow the enginecoolant temperature to reach 150°F (66°C) beforeshutting off the engine.

2-24

Engine Coolant HeaterThe engine coolant heater can provide easier startingand better fuel economy during engine warm-up in coldweather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicleswith an engine coolant heater should be pluggedin at least four hours before starting.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Find the plug-in outlet located under the driver door.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt ACoutlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet couldcause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind ofextension cord could overheat and cause a fire.You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord intoa properly grounded three-prong 110-volt ACoutlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-dutythree-prong extension cord rated for at least15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug andstore the cord as it was before to keep it awayfrom moving engine parts, and prevent damage.

The length of time the heater should remain plugged independs on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer inthe area where you will be parking the vehicle for thebest advice on this.

2-25

Diesel Engine Exhaust BrakeIf the vehicle has a Isuzu 6H Diesel Engine, it may havean exhaust brake, which is located in the exhaustsystem.

If the vehicle has a 6.6L DURAMAX® 6600 orCaterpillar® Diesel Engine, it may have an exhaustbrake, which is controlled through the turbocharger.

The exhaust brake for both engines operates the same.

The exhaust brake switchis located in the instrumentpanel switchbank.

Push the bottom of the switch to turn the exhaust brakeon. When you push the top of the switch, the exhaustbrake will turn off.

There is an indicator light on the instrument panelsimilar to the symbol on the switch, that comes on whenthe exhaust brake is active. See Exhaust BrakeIndicator Light on page 3-41 for more information.

While using the exhaust brake, the proper gear rangeselection is important. The exhaust brake is mosteffective if the gear range selected is the lowest possiblerange that does not allow the engine rpm to go morethan 200 rpm above rated (full load) rpm. If you havea Caterpillar® Diesel Engine, do not exceed 2900 rpm.If you have an Isuzu 6H Diesel engine, do notexceed 2550 rpm. If the vehicle has a DURAMAX®

6600 Diesel Engine, do not exceed 3600 rpm.

If the vehicle has an Allison® 1000/2200/2300/2350/2500/2550 series automatic transmission and this button ispressed, the transmission downshifts to a factory defaultsetting of third gear. To change the default setting, or formore information on factory default settings, contact yourdealer/retailer for assistance.

The accelerator and clutch pedals must be released inorder for the exhaust brake to engage. The exhaustbrake will automatically shut off when the antilock brakesystem is active.

If the vehicle has a Caterpillar® Diesel Engine or aDURAMAX® 6600 Diesel Engine, the exhaust brake willbecome active in cruise control when you exceed theset speed by 3 to 5 mph.

2-26

Automatic Transmission OperationIf the vehicle has an Allison® five-speed or six-speedautomatic transmission, you will also find an Allison®

Transmission Operator’s Manual in the vehicle whichgoes into more detail. On the headliner, in front of andabove the driver, or in some other place near the driver,you will see a label that describes important operatingfacts about the automatic transmission in the vehicle.Make sure you follow the instructions on this label.

Vehicles equipped with an Allison® 3000 Seriestransmission come with a push button shift selector thatwill display transmission information. Refer to the Allison®

Transmissions Operator’s Manual for more informationon transmission diagnostics and shift selector operation.

Be sure to keep the parking brake set until you areready to shift into D (Drive). See Parking Brake (WithHydraulic Brakes) on page 2-38 or Parking Brake (WithAir Brakes) on page 2-41 for parking brake procedure.Press the brake pedal while shifting from N (Neutral) orP (Park) to a drive gear.

All vehicles with automatic transmission can be startedin P (Park), if equipped, or in N (Neutral). See theAllison® Transmission Operator’s Manual for additionalinformation.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of the vehiclewithout the parking brake firmly set. The vehiclecan roll. If you have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or others couldbe injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground, alwaysset the parking brake.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while the engine isrunning at high speed is dangerous. Unless yourfoot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle couldmove very rapidly. You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shift into a drive gearwhile the engine is running at high speed.

2-27

Overdrive DefeatIf your vehicle has this feature, you can select not toshift up to fifth gear. This is useful when towing or undera heavy load.

The overdrive defeatswitch is located in theinstrument panel tothe right of the steeringcolumn.

Press the switch to limit the transmission to fourth gear.This will allow for fewer downshifts while pulling atrailer or under a heavy load. The indicator light in theswitch comes on whenever overdrive defeat is active.

If the vehicle is equipped with a push button shiftselector, refer to the Allison® Transmission Operator’sManual for shift selector operating instructions.

Manual Transmission Operation

Using the ClutchWhen you are starting to move the vehicle, it isimportant to begin with the engine speed at idle. Thenstart to engage the clutch and listen for an engine speeddrop of about 100 rpm. At this point, the clutch isengaging, so you should increase the engine speed andfully engage the clutch. It is important not to increasethe engine speed sooner or before the clutch begins itsengagement. If you do, you can cause damage tothe vehicle.

Double-ClutchingYou must use the double-clutching method when youshift an unsynchronized gear set. Disengage the clutch,shift to N (Neutral) and engage the clutch. Whenupshifting, slow the engine until the engine rpm androad speed match. When downshifting, accelerate theengine until the engine rpm and road speed match. Thenquickly disengage the clutch and move the shift leverto the next gear position and engage the clutch.

2-28

Eaton® Fuller® Five and Six-SpeedTransmissions and TTC SpicerSeven-Speed TransmissionsThese transmissions have gears that automaticallysynchronize when you shift up or down (except 1 (First)gear on the five-speed and seven-speed transmissionwhich is unsynchronized). Choose the gear that willmaintain the road speed you want while keepingthe engine above two-thirds of the governed speed.When the engine speed drops below two-thirds of thegoverned speed, shift into the next lower gear beforeyour engine begins to lug. When you shift down, be sureto double-clutch if required.

Eaton® Fuller® Nine and Ten-SpeedNon-Synchronized ManualTransmissionsIf the vehicle has one of these transmissions the enginerpm and road speed must match when upshifting anddownshifting. The label above the windshield will tell youthe operating basics you need to know.

The following are driving tips.

• Always choose an initial starting gear suitable forthe load and terrain.

• Always use double-clutching procedures whenshifting.

• Never move the range shift lever to the LO speedgear position after HI range preselection, oranytime the transmission is in the HI range.

• Never move the range knob or lever with the shiftlever in N (Neutral) while the vehicle is moving.

• Never make a range shift while moving inR (Reverse).

Clutch Brake (Vehicles withNon-Synchronized Transmission)A clutch brake is used to stop transmission input shaftrotation so that 1 (First) or R (Reverse) gear selectioncan be initiated when the vehicle is at a standstilland the engine is idling.Press the clutch pedal all the way down to the floorboardto apply the clutch brake.When using the clutch brake, disengage the clutch pedaland shift the transmission into either the initial startinggear or R (Reverse). If the tooth-butting occurs betweenthe clutching teeth, re-engage the clutch while applyinglight pressure to the shift lever. This will provide for asmooth shift into either 1 (First) or R (Reverse) gear.

Notice: Using the clutch brake for shifting into anygear other than 1 (First) or R (Reverse) may causepremature wear of the clutch brake and make gearshift effort more difficult. Do not use the clutch brakefor shifting after engaging 1 (First) or R (Reverse).

2-29

Power Take-Off (PTO)

The vehicle may havepower take-off (PTO). ThePTO switch is locatedon the instrument panel.

An indicator in the switch comes on to show PTO isactive. See High Idle System on page 2-20 formore information.

A PTO is a gearbox or mechanical device used totransmit mechanical power from the powertrain, throughgears or a transmission, to another mechanical orhydraulic device. Before using a PTO, refer to themanufacturer’s or installer’s instructions.

Four-Wheel DriveIf the vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send theengine’s driving power to all four wheels for extratraction. To get the most satisfaction out of four-wheeldrive, you must be familiar with its operation. Readthe part that follows before using four-wheel drive. Youshould use two-wheel drive high for most normaldriving conditions.

Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement infour-wheel drive for an extended period of time cancause premature wear on the vehicle’s powertrain.Do not drive on clean, dry pavement in Four-WheelDrive for extended periods of time.

2-30

Locking Hubs

Turn the dial of the hublock (A) from the FREE positionto the LOCK position to lock the front axle.

Turn the dial of the hublock (A) from the LOCK positionto the FREE position to unlock the axle.

You do not have to back the vehicle up to disengagethe hublocks.

If the vehicle hasfour-wheel drive, thetransfer case knob islocated to the right of thesteering wheel on theinstrument panel. Use thisknob to shift into andout of four-wheel drive.

An indicator light shows you which position the transfercase is in. The indicator lights come on briefly whenyou turn on the ignition and one stays on. If the lights donot come on, you should take the vehicle to yourdealer/retailer for service. An indicator light flashes whileshifting the transfer case. It will remain on when theshift is complete. If for some reason the transfer casecannot make a requested shift, it returns to the lastchosen setting.

Hublock Dial Location Hublock Dial

2-31

Recommended Transfer Case Settings

Driving ConditionsTransfer Case Settings

2 m 4 m 4 n N

Normal YES

Severe YES

Extreme YES

Vehicle in Tow* YES

*See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-23 for furtherinformation.

2m (Two-Wheel High): This setting is for driving in moststreet and highway situations. The transfer case doesnot drive the front axle in two-wheel drive. The front-axlespins if the front wheel hubs are locked. Be sure tounlock the hubs to achieve the best fuel economy.

4m (Four-Wheel High): Use Four-Wheel High when youneed extra traction, such as on snowy or icy roads or inmost off-road situations. Be sure the front wheel hubs arelocked when you want to drive in Four-Wheel High.

4n (Four-Wheel Low): This setting sends maximumpower to all four wheels. You might choose Four-WheelLow if you are driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud,and climbing or descending steep hills. Be sure the frontwheel hubs are locked when you want to drive inFour-Wheel Low.

{CAUTION:

Shifting the transfer case to Neutral can cause thevehicle to roll even if the transmission is inP (Park). You or someone else could be injured. Ifyou are going to leave the vehicle, set the parkingbrake and shift the transmission to P (Park) andmake sure the transfer case is in a drive gear.

Notice: If the vehicle has an Allison® transmissionand you try to put the transmission in P (Park)while the transfer case is in Four-Wheel Low, thetransmission might not go into P (Park) andcould damage the vehicle. When parking the vehicle,make sure the transfer case is in Two-Wheel Highor Four-Wheel High.

N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case toN (Neutral) only when towing the vehicle.

2-32

Shifting Into Four-Wheel HighTurn the knob to four-wheel high. This can be done at3 mph or less. The indicator light flashes while shifting.It remains on after the shift is complete. Be sure tolock the front hubs.

Shifting Into Two-Wheel HighTurn the knob to Two-Wheel High. This can be done at3 mph or less.

Shifting Into Four-Wheel LowTo shift to Four-Wheel Low, the vehicle’s engine must berunning and the vehicle must be stopped or moving lessthan 3 mph (5 km/h) with the transmission in N (Neutral).The preferred method for shifting into Four-Wheel Low isto have the vehicle moving 1 or 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h).Turn the knob to Four-Wheel Low. You must wait forthe Four-Wheel Low indicator light to stop flashing andremain on before shifting the transmission into gear.Be sure to lock the front hubs.

Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear beforethe Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light hasstopped flashing could damage the transfer case.To help avoid damaging the vehicle, always wait forthe Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light to stopflashing before shifting the transmission into gear.

If you turn the knob to Four-Wheel Low while thevehicle is in gear and/or moving, the Four-Wheel Lowindicator light flashes for 30 seconds and does notcomplete the shift unless the vehicle is moving less than3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the transmission is in N (Neutral).After 30 seconds, the transfer case returns to thesetting last chosen. If the vehicle is in gear and movingless than 3 mph (4.8 km/h), the transfer case shiftsto Four-Wheel High.

2-33

Shifting Out of Four-Wheel LowTo shift from Four-Wheel Low to Four-Wheel High orTwo-Wheel High, the vehicle must be stopped or movingless than 3 mph (5 km/h) with the transmission inN (Neutral) with the engine running. The preferredmethod for shifting out of Four-Wheel Low is to havethe vehicle moving 1 or 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h).Turn the knob to Four-Wheel High or Two-Wheel High.You must wait for the Four-Wheel High or Two-WheelHigh indicator light to stop flashing and remain on beforeshifting the transmission into gear.

Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear beforethe Four-Wheel High or Two-Wheel High indicatorlight has stopped flashing could damage the transfercase. To help avoid damaging the vehicle, alwayswait for the Four-Wheel High or Two-Wheel Highindicator light to stop flashing before shiftingthe transmission into gear.

If the knob is turned to Four-Wheel High or Two-WheelHigh while the vehicle is in gear and/or moving, theFour-Wheel High or Two-Wheel high indicator lightflashes for 30 seconds. It will not complete the shiftunless the vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h)with the transmission in N (Neutral).

Shifting Into NeutralBefore shifting the transfer case to N (Neutral), firstmake sure the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll.

1. Set the parking brake. See Parking Brake (WithHydraulic Brakes) on page 2-38 or Parking Brake(With Air Brakes) on page 2-41 for parkingbrake apply procedure.

2. Start the vehicle.

3. Put the transmission in N (Neutral).

4. Shift the transfer case to Two-Wheel High.

5. Turn the transfer case knob all of the way pastFour-Wheel Low and hold it there for a minimumof 10 seconds. The N (Neutral) indicator lightcomes on.

6. Shift the transmission to R (Reverse) forone second, then shift the transmission to D (Drive)for one second.

7. Turn the ignition to OFF.

8. Place the transmission shift lever in P (Park).

9. Turn the ignition to LOCK.

2-34

Shifting Out of NeutralTo shift the transfer case out of N (Neutral), do thefollowing:

1. Set the parking brake. See Parking Brake (WithHydraulic Brakes) on page 2-38 or Parking Brake(With Air Brakes) on page 2-41 for parkingbrake apply procedure.

2. Apply the regular brake pedal.

3. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off.

4. Put the transmission in N (Neutral).

5. Turn the transfer case knob to the desired shiftposition (Two-Wheel High, Four-Wheel High,Four-Wheel Low).

6. After the transfer case has shifted out of N (Neutral),the indicator light goes out.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and cause prematurewear or damage to brake system parts. Verify thatthe parking brake is fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

7. Release the parking brake.

8. Start the engine and shift the transmission lever tothe desired position.

Excessively shifting the transfer case into or out of thedifferent modes can cause the transfer case to enter theshift protection mode. This protects the transfer case frompossible damage and only allows the transfer case torespond to one shift per 10 seconds. The transfer casecan stay in this mode for up to three minutes.

Parking

{CAUTION:

If you do not park the vehicle properly, it can roll.If you have left the engine running, it can movevery quickly. You or others could be injured. To besure the vehicle will not move, even when you areon level ground, follow the steps below.

2-35

Parking a Vehicle With the Two-SpeedRear Axle

1. With the engine running, shift the two-speed rearaxle into low. To be sure it is in low, you will needto move the vehicle in gear just a little.

2. Hold the brake pedal down.

3. Apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake (WithHydraulic Brakes) on page 2-38 or Parking Brake(With Air Brakes) on page 2-41 for parkingbrake apply procedure.

4. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral) for manualtransmission or P (Park) for automatic transmission.

Two-Speed Rear AxleThe Two-Speed rear axle lets the driver select LowRange and High Range. Low Range provides goodstarting torque and pulling power. When selecting HighRange the axle allows for higher road speed andfuel economy.

For better performance during off-road or under a heavyload, shift the axle into Low Range and then operatethe transmission normally.

For better performance on the highway, shift the axle toHigh Range and operate the transmission normally.

High or Low Range can be used when additional shiftsbetween transmission gears is needed while drivingon grades and for better fuel economy.

Notice: Driving in Low Range above 50 mph(80.5 kph) will damage driveline components. Drivebelow 50 mph (80.5 kph) in Low Range.

If the vehicle has this feature, there is a label on theheadliner above the windshield or in another place nearthe driver that shows how to use it. Be sure to followthe directions carefully.

2-36

Two-Speed Rear Axle Shift ControlOperation

The rear axle shift controlswitch for automatic andmanual transmissionsis located in the instrumentpanel switchbank.

Press the bottom of the switch for High Range and thetop of the switch for Low Range. The switch indicatorlight comes on when the High Range is selected.

Always start the vehicle in motion with the two-speedaxle in low range.

Shifting on a DowngradeDo not shift the two-speed axle when driving on adowngrade. The speed of the vehicle moving downhillmay make it hard to shift the axle into either Low or HighRange.

Shifting

Upshifting the AxleTo shift from Low to High Range:

1. Press the bottom of the switch to shift the axlecontrol from Low to High.

2. Release the accelerator pedal until the shift applies.

3. Then push the accelerator pedal.

Axle upshift can be abrupt, causing the vehicle to jerk.Release the accelerator slowly for a smooth shift.For manual transmissions, use the clutch while pressingthe accelerator for a smooth shift.

Downshifting the AxleTo shift from High to Low Range:

1. Press the top of the switch to shift from High to LowRange.

2. Release the accelerator pedal.

3. Then push the accelerator pedal slowly until theaxle shifts.

2-37

Split Upshift (Manual Transmissions Only)To downshift the axle with a transmission upshift:

1. Push the clutch.

2. Shift the Transmission to a higher gear.

3. Shift the axle control from High to Low Range.

4. Release the clutch.

5. Push the accelerator pedal until the axle shifts.

Split Downshift (ManualTransmission Only)To upshift the axle with a transmission downshift:

1. Shift the axle control from Low to High Range.

2. Push the clutch.

3. Shift the transmission to a lower gear.

4. Release the clutch.

5. Push the accelerator pedal until the axle shifts.

Parking Brake (With HydraulicBrakes)If the vehicle has hydraulic brakes, it has either aparking brake foot pedal or hand lever. If you have theparking brake foot pedal, it is located below theinstrument panel to the left of the steering column.

If you have the parking brake hand lever, it is located tothe right of the driver, on the floor.

To set the foot pedal parking brake, hold the regularbrake pedal down, then push down the parkingbrake pedal.

Parking Brake Hand Lever Shown

2-38

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of the vehiclewithout the parking brake firmly set. The vehiclecan roll. If you have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or others couldbe injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground, alwaysset the parking brake.

To set the hand lever parking brake, hold the regularbrake pedal down, then pull up on the handle, untilit stops.

If the ignition is on when the parking brake is set, thebrake system warning light will come on.

Once the parking brake is applied, slowly remove yourfoot from the regular brake pedal, while checking tosee if the vehicle moves. If the vehicle does startto move, press the regular brake pedal and adjust theparking brake holding force. See “Parking BrakeAdjustment” later in this section.

If the parking brake still does not set, take the vehicle toyour dealer/retailer for service.

To release the foot pedal parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal down. Pull the brake release handle,located just above the parking brake pedal.

To release the hand lever parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal down and push down on the handleuntil it stops.

If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,the brake system warning light will go off.

2-39

Parking Brake Adjustment (Hand LeverSystem Only)Make sure the parking brake burnish procedure has beenpreviously followed before continuing with any park brakeadjustment. See Parking Brake Burnish Procedure onpage 2-43 for more information. Parking brakeadjustment may be necessary after the burnishprocedure or at the scheduled maintenance intervals.

If the vehicle is has a hand-lever park brake system, anin-cab adjustment may be made to the park brakesystem. This will adjust the parking brake holding force.The adjustment is made with the knob located at theend of the hand lever.

To make an adjustment:

1. Press and hold the regular brake pedal

2. Release the parking brake

3. Turn the knob only up to a half turn to the left, topof knob toward the driver. This will increase theholding force of the system.

4. Check to see if the vehicle moves by slowlyremoving your foot from the regular brake pedal.

5. If the vehicle moves, press the regular brake andrepeat the adjustment procedure.

2-40

Notice: Over-tightening the park brake lever cancause damage to the park brake system.Over-tightening is possible by turning the knobmore than half a turn.

Over-tightening is similar to driving down the road withyour regular brakes applied. If the park brake systemis over-tightened the vehicle may seem sluggishto accelerate, and/or the park brake hand lever maybevery hard to pull up and apply the park brake.

If the park brake is over-tightened turn the knob to theright until it stops and follow the parking brakeadjustment procedure.

Vehicles with a foot-pedal park brake system must beserviced to make this adjustment. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-5 for more information.

Parking Brake (With Air Brakes)

If the vehicle has airbrakes, you will have thisparking brake. It is locatedabove the audio system inthe instrument panel.

Pulling it out applies the parking brake. The parkingbrake light will come on when the air parking brake isapplied.

2-41

Vehicles built for use as tractors or towing vehicles havetwo air brake controls. They look like this:

{CAUTION:

When the yellow PARKING BRAKE and the redTRAILER AIR SUPPLY knobs are both pushed in,the rig will be free to move. It could strikesomeone or something. When both of these knobsare pushed in, hold the regular brake pedal downto keep the rig from moving.

To charge a trailer’s air brake system do the following:

1. Move the vehicle into the proper position.

2. Apply the parking brake by pulling the yellowparking brake knob out.

3. Hook up the trailer air system properly.

4. Get into the vehicle.

5. Push and hold down the regular brake pedal.

6. Push in both the yellow parking brake and the redtrailer air supply knobs. This will charge the trailer’sair system.

After a few minutes, the trailer system should be fullycharged. When it is, the air pressure gage will showabout 125 to 135 psi (862 to 931 kPa). See Air PressureGage on page 3-47 for more information.

For driving with a trailer, the yellow and red knobs, ifequipped, must be pushed in. When you are not pulling atrailer, the red trailer air supply knob must be pulled out.

2-42

{CAUTION:

If you apply any one of the air brake parkingcontrols while the vehicle is moving, the rig willstop suddenly. If you are not ready for this, you orothers could be injured. Do not apply any one ofthese controls while you are driving, unless youhave to make an emergency stop.

If the air pressure drops below 60 to 70 psi(413 to 482 kPa), the primary brake warning light andbuzzer will come on. If the air pressure drops to35 to 45 psi (241 to 310 kPa), the red trailer air supplyknob will automatically pop out and apply the springbrakes on the trailer.

If the air pressure drops to 35 to 45 psi (241 to 310 kPa),the yellow park brake knob will automatically pop outand apply the spring brakes on the truck or tractor.

If you ever have a complete loss of air so that the airbrakes automatically apply, there is a way that thetow operator can release the parking brakes to tow thevehicle. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-23.

Parking Brake Burnish ProcedureAll vehicles which have hydraulic brakes have a parkingbrake. It is recommended that the parking brake beburnished as part of the new vehicle break-in. Theparking brake will work best after it has been burnishedfollowing these instructions:

1. Make sure that there is no other traffic around,bring the vehicle speed up to 20 mph (32 km/h)and apply the parking brake. Let the vehicle cometo a complete stop. Apply the base brakes anddisengage the parking brake.

2. Repeat the burnishing procedure in Step 1 a totalof 10 times.

3. Between stops, drive the vehicle about2.5 miles (4 km).

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on candamage the transmission and brake system parts.Verify that the parking brake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off before driving.

2-43

Air SuspensionThe vehicle may have the Hendrickson HAS Seriessingle-axle air suspension which is designed fora single-axle on-highway use. This feature is availablein 19,000 lb (8 613.3 kg), 21,000 lb (9 525.4 kg)and 23,000 lb (10 432.6 kg) capacities.

Rear Air Suspension Dump ControlIf the vehicle is equipped with the Hendrickson HASSeries single-axle air suspension, you may havethis control. The air suspension dump control allows theoperator to lower the deck height approximately4.5 inches (11.5 cm) from the normal frame height.

The switch to deflate andinflate the air suspensionis located on theinstrument panel.

Press the bottom of the switch to deflate the airsuspension and lower the deck height. Press the top ofthe switch to return the suspension to normal deck height.

An indicator light will come on and stay on wheneverthe switch is in the dump position.

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaustparts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things thatcan burn.

2-44

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness and even death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:• The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation

(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow thatmay block underbody airflow or tail pipes).

• The exhaust smells or sounds strange ordifferent.

• The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion ordamage.



• The vehicle’s exhaust system has beenmodified, damaged or improperly repaired.

• There are holes or openings in the vehiclebody from damage or after-marketmodifications that are not completely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspectedthat exhaust is coming into the vehicle:

• Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

• Have the vehicle repaired immediately.

Never park the vehicle with the engine running inan enclosed area such as a garage or a buildingthat has no fresh air ventilation.

2-45

Diesel Particulate FilterThe vehicle has a Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) as partof the exhaust system to reduce vehicle emissions. TheDPF requires a unique exhaust tailpipe with an exhaustcooler. The exhaust cooler mixes air with the exhaust tolower the temperature before it leaves the tailpipe.

The DPF, the tailpipe, or other exhaust systemcomponents must not be altered. Inspect regularly andclean any mud or dirt from the exhaust cooler,especially where the exhaust cooler connects to thetailpipe and the openings where fresh air entersthe cooler. See “Exhaust System Inspection” under AtLeast Twice a Year on page 6-27.

The DPF will clean itself as part of normal operation.Several factors including fuel consumed, hours of engineoperation and miles driven are monitored by the EngineControl Module (ECM). The self cleaning occursapproximately once per tank of fuel.

During self cleaning, thegreen DPF indicator lightwill come on. SeeDiesel Particulate FilterWarning Light onpage 3-46.

To clean the filter, either drive the vehicle above 30 mph(50 km/h) to activate self cleaning, or stop the vehicleand perform the manual cleaning procedure. Forself cleaning, drive until the green DPF indicator lightgoes off. This will take approximately 20 minutes. Onceself cleaning has started, drive until the green indicatorlight goes off to complete the cleaning in a singleoperation if possible.

Extended idling can cause exhaust parts and gases tobecome very hot. Keep the exhaust area clear ofmaterial that could ignite or burn. See Parking OverThings That Burn on page 2-44 for more information.

{CAUTION:

During DPF self cleaning or during extended idlingin P (Park), the exhaust system and exhaustgases are very hot. Things that burn could touchhot exhaust parts under the vehicle and ignite.You or others could be burned. Do not park, oridle for an extended period of time, near or overpapers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that canburn. Keep the exhaust area clear of material thatcould ignite or burn. See Parking Over ThingsThat Burn on page 2-44 for more information.

2-46

Notice: Extended idle should be avoided becausethe DPF system is not capable of self cleaning atidle. During extended idle operation, monitor theinstrument panel telltale lights and Driver InformationCenter for messages and take appropriate indicatedaction. Continued idling with the warning light/message on could cause irreversible damage to theDPF requiring repair and possible replacement thatmight not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

When the yellow DPF indicator comes on, the filter isdirty and needs cleaning. You will also notice a changein the exhaust sound and engine idle speed. This isnormal. If you continue to drive and the exhaust filter isnot cleaned as required, the DPF indicator will changefrom yellow to red. Continuing to drive the vehiclewith the red indicator can cause filter damage.

Vehicles with DPF have specific fuel and engine oilrequirements. See What Fuel to Use on page 5-8 andEngine Oil (DURAMAX Diesel Engine) on page 5-24or Engine Oil (Caterpillar Diesel Engine) on page 5-27 orEngine Oil (Isuzu Diesel Engine) on page 5-28 orEngine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on page 5-32 for moreinformation on those requirements.

Notice: Permanent damage can occur to the DPFor related components if the required Ultra LowSulfur Diesel (15 ppm sulfur maximum) or low ashCJ-4 engine oil is not used. This damage wouldnot be covered by the vehicle warranty.

For vehicles with Power Take-Off (PTO), monitor theinstrument panel cluster for lights related to the DPF.

All engines consume some amount of engine oil. Ashis the by-product of engine oil consumption. The ash willbecome trapped in the DPF over the life of the vehicle.Eventually, the buildup of ash will restrict the exhaustgases and the DPF will need to be cleaned or replaced.

See Accessories and Modifications on page 5-3 forimportant information if you are considering addingaccessories or modifying the vehicle.

2-47

Manual Cleaning Procedure

{CAUTION:

During DPF self cleaning, the exhaust system andexhaust gases are very hot. Stay clear of thetailpipe area and do not park over things that burn.You or others could be burned or the vehicle couldcatch fire. See Parking Over Things That Burn onpage 2-44.

If the yellow or red DPF indicator is on, you can cleanthe DPF by performing a manual cleaning.

When it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. Perform DPFmanual cleaning in a well ventilated area. DPF Manualcleaning must be performed outdoors, as follows. Oncemanual cleaning is started, complete the manual cleaningin a single operation if possible. If manual cleaning is notcompleted, as indicated by the green DPF indicator goingoff, and the yellow or red indicator light remains on, selfcleaning might not be allowed until the vehicle is stoppedand manual cleaning is performed until completed.

1. Check engine oil and engine coolant levels to besure they are at proper operating levels.

2. To prevent running out of fuel during manualcleaning, make sure there is at least a quarter of atank of fuel.

3. Check to make sure the area near the exhausttailpipe and under the exhaust system are clearof any materials that could catch fire. Keep peopleaway from the area of the exhaust system andexhaust gases.

2-48

4. Fully set the parking brake.

5. Shift the transmission to P (Park) or N (Neutral).

6. Idle the engine. If you used the idling control knob toincrease the engine speed, restore it all the way tothe left to reduce the engine speed.

7. If the vehicle has a Power Take Off (PTO), turn thePTO off. See Power Take-Off (PTO) on page 2-30.

8. Press the DPF switch in the instrument panelswitchbank. See Instrument Panel Switchbankon page 3-18. The green DPF indicator light comeson, the exhaust gas control valve operates,engine idle speed automatically increases, and DPFcleaning begins. Do not leave the vehicleunattended during manual cleaning.

9. When both the green and the yellow or red DPFindicator lights go off, cleaning is completed.Manual cleaning is normally completed in about30 minutes.

Under certain operating conditions, manual cleaningmight not be able to be performed, even if the soot levelin the DPF requires cleaning. This can occur because oflow coolant temperature, low battery voltage, highexhaust temperature or immediately after starting thevehicle. When manual cleaning is requested and coolanttemperature is low, an engine warm-up cycle is started.The green indicator light will come on, the exhaust gascontrol valve operates, and engine rpm increases to helpraise engine coolant temperature. When operatingconditions allow, cleaning will begin.

2-49

Running the Vehicle While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But if youever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poorventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousness and even death.Never run the engine in an enclosed area that hasno fresh air ventilation. For more information, seeEngine Exhaust on page 2-45.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if theautomatic transmission shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. Thevehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured. To besure the vehicle will not move, even when it is onfairly level ground, always set the parking brakeand move the automatic transmission shift lever toP (Park), or the manual transmission shift lever toNeutral.

Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle willnot move.

2-50

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorHold the inside rearview mirror in the center to moveit for a clearer view behind your vehicle. Adjust themirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind you.Push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it fornighttime use.

Outside Manual MirrorsAdjust the outside rearview mirrors to see a little of theside of your vehicle, and the area beside your vehicle.

Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage whengoing through an automatic car wash. To fold, push themirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward, toreturn to its original position.

Outside Power MirrorsIf the vehicle has outside power mirrors, they can beadjusted from the inside of the vehicle.

Controls for the outsidepower mirrors are locatedon the driver door.

Select the mirror you want to move by turning the switchclockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the driver orpassenger side mirror. The center position is neutral.

Then, adjust the mirror by pressing the outer arrows onthe switch until the mirror is in the desired position.

2-51

Outside Convex Mirrors

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (like othervehicles) look farther away than they really are.If you cut too sharply into the right or left lane, youcould hit a vehicle. Check the regular outsidemirrors (or the inside mirror, if you have one)before changing lanes.

The vehicle may have convex mirrors on both the driverside and the passenger side. They are curved toallow more to be seen from the driver seat.

Outside Heated MirrorsIf your vehicle has this feature, the outside rearviewmirrors can be defrosted.

The switch is located inthe instrument panelswitchbank.

Press the bottom of the switch to turn the outsideheated rearview mirrors on. The switch indicator lightcomes on and stays on whenever the outside heatedrearview mirrors are activated.

2-52

Storage AreasYour vehicle includes a number of storagecompartments.

Some vehicles have storage areas in the instrumentpanel. Another small storage area may be locatedoverhead. Other models may have more storage areaunderneath the front passenger bench seat. Lift the seatcushion to use the storage area.

Your vehicle may have a storage tray located behindthe driver and passenger seats.

All models also have storage compartments locatedbeneath the floorboard on both sides of the vehicle.

Center Console StorageYour vehicle may have a center console compartment.

The back of your center bench seat may also foldforward to reveal a console compartment.

The release strap for the center console is locatedbetween the center seat and passenger seat.

To expose the storage compartment, pull the strap torelease the seatback. Then fold the seatback forward.

To open the storage compartment, press the releasebutton and lift the lid rearward. With the lid closed, it canbe used as a clipboard to hold papers in place.

Before returning the seatback to the upright position,make sure the console is closed. Lift the seatback all theway up until it clicks. Push and pull on the seatbackto make sure the seat is locked in place.

2-53

✍ NOTES

2-54

Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6Horn .............................................................3-6Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-7Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-8Windshield Washer .........................................3-9Cruise Control ..............................................3-10Exterior Lamps .............................................3-14Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-14Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-15Marker Lamps ..............................................3-16Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-16Dome Lamps ...............................................3-16Entry Lighting ...............................................3-17Reading Lamps ............................................3-17Instrument Panel Switchbank ..........................3-18Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-19Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-19

Climate Controls ............................................3-20Climate Control System .................................3-20Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-22Rear Heating System ....................................3-23

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-23Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-24Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-25Trip Odometer ..............................................3-25Tachometer .................................................3-25Engine Speed Limiter ....................................3-25Safety Belt Reminders ...................................3-26Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-27Airbag Off Light ............................................3-28Charging System Light ..................................3-29Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-30Service Transmission Warning Light ................3-30Range Inhibit Warning Indicator ......................3-31Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-31Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light ........3-33Trailer Antilock Brake System Warning Light .......3-34Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-34

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-1

Low Coolant Warning Light ............................3-35Wait to Start Light ........................................3-35Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-36Oil Pressure Gage ........................................3-38Low Oil Level Light .......................................3-39Change Engine Oil Light ................................3-39Engine Overspeed Warning Light ....................3-40Engine Shutdown Warning Light .....................3-40Transmission Temperature Gage .....................3-40Exhaust Brake Indicator Light .........................3-41Differential Lock Indicator Light .......................3-41Reduced Engine Power Light .........................3-42Highbeam On Light .......................................3-42Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

Indicator Light ...........................................3-42Low Washer Fluid Warning Light .....................3-43Power Take-Off Light (PTO) ...........................3-43

Check Gages Warning Light ...........................3-43Fuel Gage ...................................................3-44Water in Fuel Warning Light ...........................3-45Change Fuel Filter Warning Light ....................3-45Diesel Particulate Filter Warning Light ..............3-46Air Filter Restriction Indicator ..........................3-46Air Pressure Gage ........................................3-47Hourmeter Gage ...........................................3-47

Audio System(s) .............................................3-48Setting the Clock ..........................................3-48Radio(s) ......................................................3-49Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-57Radio Reception ...........................................3-58Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................3-58Chime Level Adjustment ................................3-58

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-2

✍ NOTES

3-3

Instrument Panel Overview

Automatic Transmission Shown, Manual Transmission Similar

3-4

The main components of the instrument panel are the following:

A. Outlet Adjustment on page 3-22.B. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3-24.C. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation

on page 2-27 or Manual Transmission Operationon page 2-28.

D. Air Brake Controls. See Parking Brake (WithHydraulic Brakes) on page 2-38 or Parking Brake(With Air Brakes) on page 2-41.

E. Transfer Case Controls (If Equipped). SeeFour-Wheel Drive on page 2-30. Air Filter Gage(If Equipped). See Air Filter Restriction Indicator onpage 3-46.

F. Auxiliary Gages. See Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicators on page 3-23.

G. Exterior Lamps on page 3-14.H. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.I. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6.J. Audio System(s) on page 3-48.K. Climate Control System on page 3-20.L. Instrument Panel Switchbank on page 3-18.M. Airbag Off Switch on page 1-55.N. Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 3-19.

3-5

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this buttonlocated on top of the steering column, to make the frontand rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warnsothers that you are having trouble. Press again to turn theflashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, the vehicle’sturn signals will not work.

HornSound the horn by pushing the center of the steeringwheel. If you have the optional air horn, it is controlledby a cord that you will find up above and to the leftof the driver. The harder the cord is pulled, the louderthe air horn will sound. The air horn works only after theair brake system pressure gets up to about 115 psi(790 kPa). The air horn will work properly unless the airbrake system pressure drops below 60 psi (415 kPa).

Tilt WheelA tilt wheel lets the steering wheel be adjusted.

The tilt lever is located on the left side of the steeringcolumn.

To tilt the wheel, hold the wheel and pull the lever. Thenmove the wheel to a comfortable position and releasethe lever to lock the wheel in place.

3-6

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever located on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

G : Turn and Lane-Change Signals

23 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

8 : Windshield Wipers

L : Windshield Washer

J : Cruise Control (If Equipped)

Information for these features is on the pages following.

Turn and Lane-Change Signals

An arrow on the instrumentpanel cluster flashes in thedirection of the turn orlane change.

Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flashto signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lanechange is complete.

The lever returns to its starting position whenever it isreleased.

If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrow flashesrapidly or does not come on, a signal bulb may beburned out. Check the turn signal flasher and circuitbreaker. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-96.Check for burned out bulbs that may need replacing.

3-7

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low to high beam orhigh to low beam, pull the multifunction lever all the waytoward you, then release it.

When the high beamsare on, this light on theinstrument panel clusterwill also be on.

Windshield Wipers

The windshield wipers arecontrolled by turning theband with the wiper symbolon it.

9 (Off): Turns off the windshield wipers.

8 (Mist): For a single wiping cycle. Hold it there untilthe wipers start, then let go. The wipers will stopafter one cycle. If more wipes are needed, hold theband on mist longer.

The wiper speed can be set for long or short delaysbetween wipes. Turn the band to select the delay time.The farther the band is turned upward or downward,the longer or shorter the delay.

3-8

For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band towardyou to the first solid band below the delay settings.

For high-speed wiping, turn the band farther, to the lastsolid band below the delay settings.

Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before usingthem. If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them. If they become worn ordamaged, get new blades or blade inserts. For moreinformation, see Windshield Wiper Blade Replacementon page 5-71.

The windshield wiper motor is protected from overloadby a circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheatsdue to heavy snow or ice the wiper will stop untilthe motor cools. Although the circuit is protected fromelectrical overload, overload due to heavy snow orice may cause wiper linkage damage.

Windshield Washer

L (Washer Fluid): There is a paddle marked with thewindshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunctionlever. Press the paddle to spray washer fluid on thewindshield. The wipers will clear the window and theneither stop or return to the preset speed.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use your washer untilthe windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking yourvision.

3-9

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)or more can be maintained without keeping your footon the accelerator. Cruise control does not workat speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

If the brakes or clutch pedal, if the vehicle has a manualtransmission, is applied, the cruise control will shut off.

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous where youcannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do notuse the cruise control on winding roads or inheavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous on slipperyroads. On such roads, fast changes in tire tractioncan cause excessive wheel slip, and you couldlose control. Do not use cruise control on slipperyroads.

For vehicles with thisfeature, it is located at theend of the multifunctionlever.

T (Set): Press this button at the end of the lever toset the cruise control speed.

9 (Off): Turns off the cruise control.

R (On): Turns on the cruise control.

S (Resume/Accelerate): Turns on resume/accelerate.

3-10

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on when you arenot using cruise, you might hit a button and gointo cruise when you do not want to. You could bestartled and even lose control. Keep the cruisecontrol switch off until you want to use cruisecontrol.

1. Move the cruise control switch to on.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press T at the end of the lever and release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Theaccelerator pedal will not go down.

Resuming a Set SpeedIf the cruise control is set at a desired speed and thenthe brake is applied, this shuts off the cruise control.But it does not need to be reset.

Once the vehicle is going about 25 mph (40 km/h) ormore, move the cruise control switch briefly from R to S .

The vehicle returns to the previously chosen speedand stays there.

If the switch is held at resume/accelerate, the vehiclekeeps going faster until the switch is released orapply the brake. So unless you want the vehicle to gofaster, do not hold the switch at resume/accelerate.

3-11

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed:

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higherspeed. Press T at the end of the lever, thenrelease the button and the accelerator pedal. Thevehicle now cruises at the higher speed.

• Move the cruise switch from R to S . Hold it thereuntil the desired speed is reached, and thenrelease the switch. To increase the vehicle speed insmall amounts, move the switch briefly to S .Each time this done, the vehicle goes about 1 mph(1.6 km/h) faster.

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControl

Press T at the end of the lever until the lower speeddesired is reached, then release it.

To slow down in small amounts, tap the button briefly.Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about 1 mph(1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle willslow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.

3-12

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well the cruise control works on hills depends uponthe vehicles speed, load and the steepness of the hills.When going up steep hills, you may want to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When goingdownhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear tokeep your speed down. When the brake or clutch isapplied the cruise control will shut off.

For vehicles with the exhaust brake option and theexhaust brake is turned on, the exhaust brake may comeon and try to slow down the vehicle to the set cruisecontrol speed if the vehicle has accelerated past the setcruise control speed while going downhill.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are four different ways to turn off the cruisecontrol:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal (manual andautomatic transmissions).

• Press the clutch pedal to the floor (manualtransmissions).

• Move the cruise switch to 9 .

• Shift the transmission to N (Neutral).

Erasing Speed MemoryThe cruise control set speed memory is erased whenthe ignition is turned off.

3-13

Exterior Lamps

The control located to the left of the steering columnoperates the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp control has three positions:

OFF: Turns off all lamps except the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL).

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps,together with the following:

• Marker Lamps

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

O (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps, togetherwith the previously listed lamps and lights.

Change the headlamps from low to high beam bypulling the turn signal/multifunction lever toward you.Pull the lever toward you again to return to low beam.

A circuit breaker protects the headlamps. If there isan electrical overload, the headlamps will flicker on andoff. Have the headlamp wiring checked right away ifthis ever happens.

Headlamps on ReminderFor vehicles with this system, a tone will sound whenthe headlamps and/or parking lamps are turned on andthe ignition is in LOCK/OFF or ACC/ACCESSORY.

3-14

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier forothers to see the front of your vehicle during theday. Fully functional daytime running lamps are requiredon all vehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system will make the headlamps come onat reduced brightness when the following conditionsare met:

• The ignition is on,

• the exterior lamp control is off, and

• the parking brake is released.

When the DRL are on, only the headlamps will be on.The taillamps, sidemarker, instrument panel lights,and other lamps will not be on.

When it gets dark, theDRL indicator light is areminder to turn theheadlamps on.

When the headlamps are turned on, the other lampsthat come on with the headlamps will be on.

When the headlamps are turned off, the regular lampswill go off, and the low-beam headlamps will changeto the reduced brightness of DRL.

To idle the vehicle with the DRL off, set the parkingbrake. The DRL will stay off until the parking brake isreleased.

Turn on the regular headlamp system when it isneeded.

3-15

Marker LampsFor vehicles with this feature, the marker and clearancelamps can be manually blinked.

The marker lamp defeatswitch is located in theinstrument panelswitchbank.

Press and hold the bottom of the switch to turn off themarker and clearance lamps. When the switch isreleased, the marker and clearance lamps will comeback on.

Instrument Panel BrightnessThis feature controls the brightness of the instrumentpanel lights.

The thumbwheel for this feature is located to the right ofthe exterior lamp control.

Turn the thumbwheel up to brighten the lights. Whenthe thumbwheel is moved to the first position, the radiodisplay and transmission selection display will go tofull intensity. The instrument panel cluster will also bedimly lit. Moving the thumbwheel up to the next positionwill activate the interior dome lamps.

Dome LampsThe dome lamps will come on when a door is opened.

The dome lamps can be turned on by moving thethumbwheel, located to the right of the exterior lampcontrol, all the way up to the second position. In thisposition, the dome lamps will remain on whether a dooris open or closed.

The dome override button can set the dome lampsto automatically come on when a door is open, or toremain off.

3-16

The dome override button is located below the exteriorlamp control.

If the dome override button is pushed in, the dome lampswill not come on. If a door is left open for an extendedperiod of time and this helps to prevent the batteryrunning down.

If the dome override button is in the out position, theinterior lamps will work as usual.

Entry LightingThe delayed illumination feature allows you to enter orexit the vehicle with the lights on for about 20 seconds,after the door is closed or the ignition is cycled.

Reading LampsFor vehicles with reading lamps, press the button nextto the lamp to turn the lamp on or off.

3-17

Instrument Panel Switchbank This switchbank is located in the center of the instrumentpanel.

e : Marker Lamps on page 3-16.

g/ j : Power Take-Off (PTO) on page 2-30 andHigh Idle System on page 2-20.

i : Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8.

f : Outside Heated Mirrors on page 2-52.

L : Diesel Particulate Filter on page 2-46.

h : Rear Air Suspension Dump Control Switch.See Air Suspension on page 2-44.

k : Rear Axle Shift Control Switch. See Two-SpeedRear Axle on page 2-36.

q : Diesel Engine Exhaust Brake on page 2-26.

l : Differential Lock Control Switch. See Rear AxleDifferential Lock Control on page 4-7.

c : Airbag Off Switch on page 1-55.

If the vehicle does not have some of the featurescontrolled by these switches, a blank switch markeris in its place.

3-18

Accessory Power Outlet(s)Accessory power outlets let you plug in auxiliaryelectrical equipment, such as a cellular telephone.

The accessory power outlet is located on thepassenger’s side of the instrument panel.

To use an outlet, pull the cover down. When not usingit, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.

This circuit is protected by a fuse and has a maximumcurrent level.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on forextended periods will drain the battery. Always turnoff electrical equipment when not in use and do notplug in equipment that exceeds the maximumamperage rating.

Certain electrical accessories may not be compatiblewith the accessory power outlet and could resultin blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience aproblem, see your dealer/retailer for additionalinformation on accessory power outlets.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to thevehicle can damage it or keep other componentsfrom working as they should. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not useequipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer beforeadding electrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow theproper installation instructions included with theequipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can causedamage not covered by the warranty. Do not hangany type of accessory or accessory bracket from theplug because the power outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only.

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterFor vehicles with an ashtray and a cigarette lighter, theyare located in the center floor console. To open theremovable ashtray, flip open the top.

Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable itemsare put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignite them and possiblydamage the vehicle. Never put flammable itemsin the ashtray.

To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way and letit go. When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while itis heating does not let the lighter back away fromthe heating element when it is hot. Damage fromoverheating can occur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold acigarette lighter in while it is heating.

3-19

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle canbe controlled with these systems.

A. Fan ControlB. Temperature ControlC. Air Delivery Mode Control

9 (Off): Turns the system off.

Temperature Control: Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thetemperature.

9 (Fan): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the fan speed. To turn the fan off,turn the air delivery control counterclockwise to the offposition.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to change the direction of the airflowinside the vehicle.

To change the current mode, select one of the following:

H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel vents.

) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrumentpanel and floor vents. Cooler air is directed to the uppervents and warmer air to the floor vents.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor vents. Use thismode to send air to the rear of the vehicle. Keepthe area under the front seats free of objects that couldobstruct airflow to the rear of the vehicle.

- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog ormoisture. Outside air is directed to the floor anddefroster outlets. Adjust the temperature knob forwarmer or cooler air. The air conditioning compressormay operate in this setting to dehumidify the air.

0 (Defrost): This mode removes fog or frost from thewindshield more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield,with some going to the floor outlets and front sidewindows. The air conditioning compressor may operate inthis setting to dehumidify the air.

The temperature knob should be in the red area and thefan control toward high. Do not drive the vehicle until allthe windows are clear.

Vehicles Without Air Conditioning

3-20

A. Fan ControlB. Temperature ControlC. Air Delivery Mode

Control

D. Rear WindowDefogger

On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside airescape; then close them. This helps to reduce the timeit takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps thesystem to operate more efficiently.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to change the direction of the airflowinside the vehicle.

Select from the following modes:

< (Maximum Air Conditioning): For maximumcooling. The system goes into recirculation mode andhelps to maximize the air conditioner’s performance andthe vehicle’s fuel economy. This setting also cools the airthe fastest.

Y (Air Conditioning): For normal cooling on hot days.Outside air is cooled and directed to the instrumentpanel vents.

) (Bi-Level Air Conditioning): Air is divided betweenthe floor and instrument panel vents. The air conditioningcompressor cycles continuously in this setting as long asthe outside temperature is warm enough to activate thecompressor.

H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel vents.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor vents. Use thismode to send air to the rear of the vehicle. Keep the areaunder the front seats free of objects that could obstructairflow to the rear of the vehicle.

- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog ormoisture. Outside air is directed to the floor anddefroster outlets. Adjust the temperature knob forwarmer or cooler air. The air conditioning compressormay operate in this setting to dehumidify the air.

0 (Defrost): This mode removes fog or frost from thewindshield more quickly. Air is directed to thewindshield, with some going to the floor outlets andfront side windows. The air conditioning compressor mayoperate in this setting to dehumidify the air.

The temperature knob should be in the red area and thefan control toward high. Do not drive the vehicle until allthe windows are clear.

Vehicles With Air Conditioning

3-21

Rear Window DefoggerFor vehicles with a rear window defogger, a warminggrid is used to remove fog or frost from the rear window.

The rear window defogger only works when theignition is in ON/RUN.

< (Rear): Press to turn the rear window defogger onor off. An indicator light comes on to show that therear window defogger is on. Be sure to clear as muchsnow from the rear window as possible.

The rear window defogger turns off several minutesafter the button is pressed. The defogger can also beturned off by turning off the engine.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside ofthe rear window. If you do, you could cut or damagethe warming grid, and the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach atemporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anythingsimilar to the defogger grid.

Outlet AdjustmentThe vehicle has air outlets on the instrument panel thatadjust the direction and amount of airflow inside thevehicle.

Move the lever on the outlet up or down to direct theairflow. Increase or reduce the amount of airflow byopening and closing the louvers. The outlets can bemoved side-to-side to direct the airflow.

Operation Tips• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,

or any other obstruction (such as leaves). Theheater and defroster will work far better, reducingthe chance of fogging the inside of the windows.

• Keep the air path under the front seats clear ofobjects. This helps air to circulate throughoutthe vehicle.

• Adding outside equipment to the front of thevehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, may affect theperformance of the heating and air conditioningsystem. Check with your dealer/retailer beforeadding equipment to the outside of the vehicle.

3-22

Rear Heating System

If the vehicle has a crewcab and has a rear heater,the thumbwheel for thisfeature is located onthe headliner.

To increase and decrease the flow of heated air to therear floor vents, turn the thumbwheel to the desiredfan speed. To turn the fan off, turn the thumbwheel allthe way down.

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gages can signal that something iswrong before it becomes serious enough to causean expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention tothe warning lights and gages could prevent injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Somewarning lights come on briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problemwith one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages andwarning lights work together to indicate a problem withthe vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on and stays onwhile driving, or when one of the gages shows theremay be a problem, check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly and even dangerous.

3-23

Instrument Panel ClusterThe instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know howfast you are going, about how much fuel is left and many other things you will need to drive safely and economically.

Isuzu 6H Diesel Engine shown, 6.6L & 7.2L Diesel and Gasoline Engine similar

3-24

Speedometer and OdometerThe speedometer shows the vehicle’s speed in bothmiles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).

The odometer shows how far the vehicle has beendriven, in either miles (used in the United States)or kilometers (used in Canada).

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle hasbeen driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.

While the engine is running, press the reset button,located to the right of the trip odometer, to toggle betweenthe trip odometer and the regular odometer. Holding thereset button for two seconds while the engine is runningand the trip odometer is displayed, will reset it.

To display the odometer reading with the ignition off,press the reset button.

The hourmeter gage is accessed through the tripodometer, for more information see Hourmeter Gage onpage 3-47.

Tachometer

This gage shows the safe operating range for theengine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm).

Engine Speed LimiterAll engines have electronic engine speed limiting. Theengine limited speeds range between 2,900 and4,400 rpm depending on engine option content.

7.2L Caterpillar DieselEngine and Isuzu6H Diesel Engines

Gasoline and6.6L DURAMAX®

Diesel Engines

3-25

Engine Road Speed GovernorThis system controls maximum vehicle speedautomatically and reduces engine power until vehiclespeed gets down to maximum governed speed.

The default setting for C4500 and C5500 models up to19,500 lbs GVWR is 80 to 85 mph (128 to 136 km/h).Most other models have a default setting of 75 mph(120 km/h), although some tire sizes and treadpatterns may limit maximum speed to 55 to 65 mph(86 to 105 km/h). You may have a label on the headlinerof your vehicle with more information on your engineroad speed governor. See your GM dealer for assistancewith programming your engine limited speed.

Safety Belt Reminders

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the engine is started, a light will come on forseveral seconds to remind people to fasten their safetybelts.

The safety belt light willalso come on and stay onfor several seconds.

Safety Belt Reminder ToneIf your vehicle has this feature, when the engine isstarted, a tone will sound for several seconds to remindpeople to fasten their safety belts.

3-26

Airbag Readiness LightIf your vehicle has airbags, there is an airbag readinesslight on the instrument panel, which shows the airbagsymbol. The system checks the airbag’s electricalsystem for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. The system check includes theairbag sensors, the airbag modules, the wiring, thepassenger airbag suppression circuit and the crashsensing and diagnostic module. For more information onthe airbag system, see Airbag System on page 1-48.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flash fora few seconds. Then thelight should go out. Thismeans the system is ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start thevehicle or comes on when you are driving, your airbagsystem may not work properly. Have your vehicleserviced right away.

The airbag readiness light should flash for a fewseconds when you turn the ignition key to ON/RUN orSTART. If the light doesn’t come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on after thevehicle is started or comes on while driving, itmeans the airbag system might not be workingproperly. The airbags in the vehicle might notinflate in a crash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoid injury, have thevehicle serviced right away.

3-27

Airbag Off LightIf the vehicle has an airbag on-off switch, it also has apassenger airbag status indicator located in theinstrument panel.

When the right frontpassenger airbag ismanually turned off usingthe airbag on-off switchon the instrument panel,the indicator light OFFwill come on and stay onto remind you that theairbag has been turned off.

This light will go off when you turn the airbag on. SeeAirbag Off Switch on page 1-55 for more on this,including important safety information.

{CAUTION:

If the right front passenger’s airbag is turned offfor a person who is not in a risk group identifiedby the national government, that person will nothave the extra protection of an airbag. In a crash,the airbag will not be able to inflate and helpprotect the person sitting there.

Do not turn off the passenger’s airbag unless theperson sitting there is in a risk group identified bythe national government. See Airbag Off Switch onpage 1-55 for more on this, including importantsafety information.

3-28

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light ever comes on andstays on, it means that something may be wrongwith the airbag system. For example, the rightfront passenger airbag could inflate even thoughthe airbag on-off switch is turned off.

To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have thevehicle serviced right away. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 3-27 for more information, includingimportant safety information.

If the word ON is lit, it means that the right frontpassenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate). SeeAirbag Off Switch on page 1-55 for more on this,including important safety information.

Charging System Light

The charging system lightmay be located in theinstrument panel cluster, orwith the auxiliary warninglights in the center ofthe instrument panel.

It should come on briefly when you turn on the ignition,before the engine is running, as a check to showthat it is working.

If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, haveyour vehicle checked right away. You could have a loosegenerator drive belt or some other problem.

Driving while this light is on will drain your battery. If youmust drive a short distance with the light on, turn offyour radio and other accessories. Sustained driving witha generator failure could result in a lack of back-upbraking if the engine quits or the power steering pumpshould fail.

3-29

Voltmeter Gage

When your engine isrunning, the voltmetergage shows the chargingsystem voltage.

Readings in either warning zone indicate a possibleproblem in the electrical system.

Readings in the low warning zone may occur when alarge number of electrical accessories are operating inthe vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for anextended period. This condition is normal since thecharging system may not be able to provide full powerat engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, thiscondition should correct itself because higher enginespeeds allow the charging system to create maximumpower.

You can only drive a short time on the battery. Be sureto shut off the radio, the fan or any unnecessaryaccessories and have the system serviced.

Service Transmission Warning LightIf your vehicle has an Allison® automatic transmission,certain transmission malfunctions will turn this light on.

This light is located withthe auxiliary warning lightsin the center of theinstrument panel.

If this light comes on while you are driving, do not usethe transmission shift control or you may lose forwardgears. The computer for the transmission sensesa problem and chooses a gear to stay in so that youcan drive the vehicle in that gear. You may not be ableto drive as fast or back up when this light is on.

Notice: If you continue driving your vehicle after thetransmission warning light comes on, you coulddamage the transmission. While this light is on, thetransmission cannot operate in all gears. If youattempt to shift gears, the vehicle may not continueto move. Do not attempt to shift gears while thetransmission warning light is on. Instead, drivedirectly to an authorized dealer for service. If youcannot drive to a dealer immediately, have thevehicle towed.

3-30

Range Inhibit Warning IndicatorIf your vehicle has an Allison 1000/2200/2300/2500 series automatic transmission, a lighted barunder the current gear selected will flash.

If your vehicle has an Allison 3000/3500 series automatictransmission, the current gear selected on the pushbuttondisplay will flash.

The flashing bar or gear selection indicates thattransmission range shifts may not occur.

For detailed information on shift inhibit limitations, seethe Allison Automatic Transmission Operator’s Manual inyour vehicle for further information.

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle has either hydraulic or air brakes. Eachsystem has different warning lights.

Hydraulic Brake System Warning LightsVehicles with hydraulic brake systems have two brakesystem warning lights on the instrument panel.

If the brake warning lightcomes on, it means that thefluid level in the mastercylinder reservoir is low orthere is another problemwith your hydraulic brakes.

When it comes on, you will also hear a warning tone.

This light should come on briefly when you turn theignition key to ON/RUN. If it does not come on, then haveit fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

3-31

If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road andstop carefully. The pedal might be harder to push ormight go the floor. It can take longer to stop. If the lightremains on, have the vehicle towed for service. SeeTowing Your Vehicle on page 4-23 for more information.

The brake warning light may come on, and thewarning tone may sound, when you are turning andbraking at the same time. This is normal. See “HydraulicBrake Systems” under Braking on page 4-4.

Parking Brake Warning LightYour vehicle has a brake warning light. When theignition is on, this light will come on when you set yourparking brake. The light will stay on if your parkingbrake does not release fully.

This light should also come on when you turn theignition key to START. If it does not come on then, haveit fixed so it will be ready to remind you if the parkingbrake is applied or has not released fully.

Air Brake System Warning LightVehicles with air brake systems have a brake systemwarning light on the instrument panel.

The low air warning lightshould come on, as acheck, whenever you startthe engine.

However, it is designed to come on, and stay on, whenbrake reservoir pressure has dropped below 60 psi(410 kPa).

3-32

When the warning light comes on while you are driving,you should drive only as far as the nearest point ofsafety and then stop the vehicle. Here is a veryimportant thing for you to know:

{CAUTION:

If the air brake system warning light comes on andthe warning tone sounds, the vehicle can stopsuddenly and without further warning. This isbecause the parking brake will come on if thepressure falls below 35 to 45 psi (240 to 310 kPa).You or others could be injured. If the air brakesystem warning light comes on and the warningtone sounds, stop as soon as you can. You willnot know how quickly the system is losingpressure, so be aware that the parking brake maycome on suddenly.

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light

This light will come onbriefly when you start theengine, then it will turnoff. This is normal.

If the light stays on, or comes on when you are driving,your vehicle needs service. If the brake or low air warninglight is not on, you still have brakes, but you do not havethe antilock brake feature. If the brake and/or low airwarning light is on, you do not have antilock brakes andthere is a problem with your regular brakes. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 3-31 and Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) on page 4-5 for more information.

3-33

Trailer Antilock Brake SystemWarning Light

If your vehicle is connectedto a trailer with antilockbrakes, this light shouldcome on briefly, as acheck, when you turn onthe ignition.

When this light comes on and stays on, it means thereis something wrong in the trailer Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS). Have the system repaired immediately.

If an ABS equipped trailer is not connected, thislight is not functional.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage showsthe engine coolanttemperature. If the gagepointer moves into thered area, your enginecoolant might haveoverheated and yourengine may be too hot.

You should pull off the road, stop your vehicle and turnoff the engine as soon as possible.

See Engine Overheating on page 5-48. If you have aCaterpillar® diesel engine, also see your Caterpillar®

Operation & Maintenance Manual.

3-34

Low Coolant Warning Light

Your vehicle has a lowcoolant warning light.If this light comes on, thesystem is low on coolantand the engine mayoverheat.

The warning light should come on briefly, as a check,when you turn on the ignition.

When it comes on, you will also hear a warning tone for10 seconds. See Engine Coolant (Caterpillar DieselEngines) on page 5-47 and have your vehicle servicedas soon as you can.

This light may also come on if your vehicle has theautomatic engine shutdown system and engineshutdown has begun. See Engine Alarm and AutomaticShutdown on page 2-18 for more information.

Wait to Start LightIf your vehicle has the DURAMAX® 6.6L diesel engine,it will have glow plugs and an air intake heater. If yourvehicle has the Isuzu 6H diesel engine, it will have glowplugs and an inlet heater. If your vehicle has a Caterpillarengine, it will have an inlet heater.

The light in the center of theinstrument panel will comeon when the inlet heater orglow plugs are on and theignition key is in ON/RUN.

Wait until the indicator light goes off before turning theignition key to START.

3-35

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine LightA computer system called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operationof the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.It makes sure that emissions are at acceptable levelsfor the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleanerenvironment.

If this light comes on whileyou are driving, two thingscan happen.

First, you will not notice any difference in engineperformance, but the tail pipe emissions might increase.Second, the engine might not run properly or couldstall without warning. If either of these things happen,see your dealer/retailer for service.

This light should come on when the ignition is on, butthe engine is not running, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not come on at all, have it repaired.

Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven withthis light on, after a while, the emission controlsmight not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economymight not be as good, and the engine might notrun as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairsthat might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement of the original tireswith other than those of the same Tire PerformanceCriteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s emissioncontrols and can cause this light to come on.Modifications to these systems could lead to costlyrepairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. Thiscould also result in a failure to pass a requiredEmission Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications on page 5-3.

If the check engine light comes on and stays on, whilethe engine is running this indicates that there is anOBDII problem and service is required.

3-36

An emission system malfunction might be corrected bydoing the following:

• If the vehicle has been driven through a deeppuddle of water, the vehicle’s electrical systemmight be wet. The condition is usually correctedwhen the electrical system dries out. A few drivingtrips should turn the light off.

• Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel. Poorfuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficientlyas designed and may cause: stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear,misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling onacceleration. These conditions might go away oncethe engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditions occurs, change thefuel brand used. It will require at least one full tank ofthe proper fuel to turn the light off.See Diesel Engine Fuel on page 5-8.

If none of the above have made the light turn off, yourdealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailerhas the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools tofix any mechanical or electrical problems that might havedeveloped.

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments have ormight begin programs to inspect the emission controlequipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspectioncould prevent getting a vehicle registration.

Here are some things to know to help the vehicle passan inspection:

• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the checkengine light is on with the engine running, or if thekey is in the ON/RUN and the light is not on.

• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD II(on-board diagnostic) system determines that criticalemission control systems have not been completelydiagnosed by the system. The vehicle would beconsidered not ready for inspection. This can happenif the battery has recently been replaced or if thebattery has run down. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate critical emission controlsystems during normal driving. This can take severaldays of routine driving. If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack ofOBD II system readiness, your dealer/retailer canprepare the vehicle for inspection.

3-37

Oil Pressure Gage

The engine oil pressuregage, on the lower rightportion of your instrumentpanel cluster, showsengine oil pressure in psi(pounds per square inch) orin kPa (kilopascals).

Oil pressure may vary with outside temperature and oilviscosity, but readings of 30 to 40 psi (205 to 275 kPa)on gasoline engines at operating temperature andmoderate road speeds are normal. If you have a dieselengine, the normal operating range should be between35 and 70 psi (240 to 480 kPa).

A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by adangerously low oil level or other problem.

If you have a Caterpillar® diesel engine, also see yourCaterpillar® Operation & Maintenance Manual.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. Theengine can become so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soonas possible and have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance candamage the engine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow themaintenance schedule in this manual for changingengine oil.

3-38

Low Oil Level Light

Your vehicle may have alow oil level light.

This light should come on as a check, when you startyour engine. If the light fails to come on, have it repairedas soon as possible so you will be aware when the oillevel is low.

Vehicles that have Caterpillar® diesel engines may nothave a low oil level light. In this case, the light willneither come on as a check when you start your engine,nor will it come on to indicate a low oil level.

If this light comes on and stays on, it means yourengine is low on oil. You need to check the oil levelright away. See Engine Oil (DURAMAX Diesel Engine)on page 5-24 or Engine Oil (Caterpillar Diesel Engine)on page 5-27 or Engine Oil (Isuzu Diesel Engine)on page 5-28 or Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) onpage 5-32 for further information.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancecan damage the engine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow themaintenance schedule in this manual for changingengine oil.

Change Engine Oil Light

The change engine oil lightshould come on briefly asa bulb check when youstart the engine. If the lightdoes not come on, haveit serviced.

If the change engine oil light comes on and stays onafter you start the engine, have the oil changed.

For additional information on when to change engine oilfor gasoline engines or DURAMAX® diesel engines, seeEngine Oil (DURAMAX Diesel Engine) on page 5-24 orEngine Oil (Caterpillar Diesel Engine) on page 5-27 orEngine Oil (Isuzu Diesel Engine) on page 5-28 or EngineOil (Gasoline Engine) on page 5-32 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-5. To reset the change engine oillight, see Engine Oil Life System (Gasoline Engine) onpage 5-35 or Engine Oil Life System (DURAMAX/IsuzuDiesel Engines) on page 5-36 or Engine Oil Life System(Caterpillar Diesel Engine) on page 5-38.

3-39

Engine Overspeed Warning LightIf your vehicle has thislight, it will come on ifyour engine is operatingat too many revolutions perminute (rpm).

It will also come on for a moment as a check when youstart your engine.If it comes on when you’re driving, reduce your enginespeed immediately.

Engine Shutdown Warning LightIf your vehicle has theengine shutdown feature,this light will come onwhen engine shutdown isactive.

See Engine Alarm and Automatic Shutdown onpage 2-18 for more information.

Transmission Temperature Gage

If you have an automatictransmission and this gage,it is located above theswitchbank in the center ofthe instrument panel.

When your ignition is on, the gage shows thetemperature of the transmission oil. A reading in thewarning zone, the red area beginning at 300°F (150°C),means you must stop driving and check into thecause. One possible cause is a low oil level in thetransmission.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle with thetransmission temperature gage above normaloperating range, you can damage the transmission.This could lead to costly repairs that would notbe covered by your warranty. Do not drive yourvehicle while the transmission temperature gagereading is above normal. See your dealer for service.

3-40

Exhaust Brake Indicator Light

For vehicles with anexhaust brake, this light islocated above theclimate controls.

The exhaust brake indicator light will come on and stayon whenever the diesel engine exhaust brake orexhaust restrictor is active. For more information, seeDiesel Engine Exhaust Brake on page 2-26 and ExhaustRestrictor (Engine Warm-Up) on page 2-22.

Differential Lock Indicator Light

If your vehicle hasthis feature, this light islocated in the center ofthe instrument panel.The light is on whenthe rear differential locksystem is in use.

The light will come on momentarily during starting. If thelight fails to come on, have it repaired as soon as possibleso you will be aware when the lock system is in use.

See Rear Axle Differential Lock Control on page 4-7 formore information.

3-41

Reduced Engine Power Light

If the check engine andreduced engine powerlights are on, the electronicthrottle control may bedisabled.

A noticeable change in the vehicle’s performance mayalso occur.

If the reduced engine power light is on, but there is nochange in performance, proceed to your destination.The performance may be reduced the next timethe vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at aslower speed while the reduced engine power light is on,but acceleration and speed may be limited.

Anytime the check engine light stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to an authorized dealer/retailer as soonas possible for service.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes on whenthe high-beam headlampsare in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8for more information.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Indicator Light

This light turns onwhenever the DaytimeRunning Lamps are on.

See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 3-15 formore information.

3-42

Low Washer Fluid Warning Light

This light is located abovethe climate controls in thecenter of the instrumentpanel.

This light will come on when your vehicle is low onwindshield washer fluid.For more information, see Windshield Washer Fluid onpage 5-50.

Power Take-Off Light (PTO)

For vehicles with PowerTake-Off (PTO), this lightis located in the centerof the instrument panel.

This light will come on when the PTO switch is in theON/RUN position. See Power Take-Off (PTO) onpage 2-30 for more information.

Check Gages Warning Light

This light will come onbriefly when the engine isstarted.

If this light comes on and stays on while you are driving.It means that either the engine coolant temperaturegage or the engine oil pressure gage may be showing areading in the warning zone.

When the check gages light comes on, you will alsohear a warning tone. The tone and the light willstay activated until the problem is corrected.

This light may also come on if your vehicle is hasautomatic engine shutdown system and engineshutdown has begun. See Engine Alarm and AutomaticShutdown on page 2-18.

3-43

Fuel Gage

Your fuel gage is locatedon the right side of yourinstrument panel cluster.

When the ignition is on, your fuel gage lets you knowabout how much fuel you have left. When the gage firstshows empty, you’ll still have a little fuel left, but youshould get more fuel soon.

If your vehicle has dual fuel tanks, the reading on thegage is the total fuel left in both tanks.

Here are four concerns of some operators. None ofthese shows a problem with your fuel gage:

• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner orspeed up.

• The gage does not go back to empty when you turnoff the ignition.

• At the gas station, the pump shuts off before thegage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than thegage indicated.


3-44

Water in Fuel Warning Light

This light is located abovethe climate controls in thecenter of the instrumentpanel.

If your vehicle has the 6.6L DURAMAX® or aCaterpillar® diesel engine, this light will come on towarn you that there is water in the fuel system.

For more information on how this light works, see Waterin Fuel on page 5-11.

Change Fuel Filter Warning Light

For vehicles with this light,it is located in the center ofthe instrument panel.

If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® 6.6L engine, thislight will come on when the fuel filter needs to bechanged. If your vehicle has the Isuzu 6H 7.8L L6 dieselengine, this light will come on when water is detectedin the fuel system and when the fuel filter needs tobe changed. See Fuel Filter Replacement on page 5-18and Water in Fuel on page 5-11 for more information.

3-45

Diesel Particulate Filter WarningLight

Your vehicle may have twoDiesel Particulate Filter(DPF) Warning lights.

These lights will come on briefly when the ignition isturned to ON/RUN. One of these lights will come ongreen during DPF regeneration. If the other light comeson yellow, perform a manual regeneration or drive thevehicle for automatic regeneration. If the light changesfrom yellow to red, the DPF requires an immediateregeneration. If the DPF is not regenerated, the serviceengine soon light will come on and engine power will bereduced.

See Diesel Particulate Filter on page 2-46 and ReducedEngine Power Light on page 3-42 for more information.

Air Filter Restriction Indicator

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the gage is locatedabove the switchbank inthe center of the instrumentpanel. It monitors theengine air filter.

As the filter gets dirty, the yellow indicator will begin torise. When it reaches the red/orange change area,the filter should be replaced.

After replacing the filter, reset the gage by pressing inthe yellow reset button at the bottom of the gage.


3-46

Air Pressure Gage

If your vehicle has airbrakes, the air pressuregage is located above theswitchbank in the centerof the instrument panel.

This gage shows the air pressure for both your frontand rear brake systems.

If the needle on the gage indicates that the air pressureis below 60 to 75 psi (415 to 517 kPa), the low airwarning light will come on. An alarm will also sound ifthis happens.

The bottom yellow pointer shows the pressure availablefor the front secondary system, while the top whitepointer shows pressure for the rear primary system.There should be no more than 4 psi (28 kPa) differenceshowing between the systems.

Don’t drive until both pointers are showing at least120 psi (827 kPa), so you’ll have enough air if you needto apply your brakes.

Hourmeter GageTo access the engine hourmeter gage, press the tripodometer button three times.

The instrument panel cluster displays the accumulatedengine run time hours using the reconfigurable odometerdisplay. The engine run time hours displays onlywhen the ignition is in the LOCK or ACC/ACCESSORYposition and the trip reset button is pressed for aboutfour seconds. The value of the accumulated hours doesnot change when the battery is disconnected.

The hourmeter resets to 0.0 when 10,000 hoursare accumulated. The instrument panel cluster beginsto reaccumulate the engine run time hours from0.0 hours.

3-47

Audio System(s)If the vehicle came without a radio, the wiring provisionsfor a radio and an antenna were installed at theassembly plant, so that if you want, a radio can beinstalled at the dealer/retailer.Determine which radio the vehicle has and read thefollowing pages to become familiar with its features.

{CAUTION:

Taking your eyes off the road for extended periodscould cause a crash resulting in injury or death toyou or others. Do not give extended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access to many audio and nonaudio listings.To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,do the following while the vehicle is parked:• Become familiar with the operation and controls of

the audio system.• Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset

radio stations.

For more information, see Defensive Driving onpage 4-2.

Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before addingany equipment.

Adding audio or communication equipment couldinterfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,radio, or other systems, and could damage them.Follow federal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone equipment.

Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,parking brake, and other functions of your vehicleoperate through the radio/entertainment system.If that equipment is replaced or additional equipmentis added to your vehicle, the chimes may notwork. Make sure that replacement or additionalequipment is compatible with your vehicle beforeinstalling it. See Accessories and Modificationson page 5-3.

Setting the ClockPress and hold the HR (down) or MIN (up) arrow fortwo seconds. Then press HR until the correct hourdisplays. Press and hold MIN until the correct minutedisplays. The time can be set with the ignition on or off.

3-48

Radio(s)

Your vehicle has one of these radios as its audio system.

Playing the RadioPWR (Power): Press to turn the system on and off.

VOL (Volume): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or to decrease the volume.

RCL (Recall): Press to switch the display between theradio station frequency and the time. When the ignition isoff, press to display the time.

Finding a StationAM FM: Press to switch between FM1, FM2, and AM.The selection displays.

TUNE: Turn to select radio stations.

o SEEK p: Press the arrows to go to the previous orto the next station.

To scan stations, press and hold either arrow fortwo seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes toa station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the nextstation. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow formore than four seconds until two beeps sound. The radiogoes to the first preset station stored on the pushbuttons,plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next presetstation. Press either arrow again to stop scanningpresets.

The radio only seeks and scans stations, with a strongsignal, that are in the selected band.

Radio with CD shown, AM-FM Radio similar

Radio with Cassette

3-49

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), canbe programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,by performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. When thatnumbered pushbutton is pressed, the station thatwas set, returns.

5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

AUDIO: To adjust the bass or the treble, pressand release the AUDIO button until BAS (bass) orTRE (treble) displays. Then press and hold theup w or the down x arrow to increase or todecrease. If a station is weak or has static,decrease the treble.

To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, selectBAS or TRE. Then press and hold the AUDIO button formore than two seconds until a beep sounds. B and azero or T and a zero displays.

To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controlsto the middle position, first end out of audio modeby pressing another button, causing the radio to performthat function, or by waiting five seconds for the displayto return to the time of day. Then press and holdthe AUDIO button for more than two seconds until abeep sounds. CEN (center) displays.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the rightand the left speakers, press and release the AUDIObutton until BAL (balance) displays. Then press and holdthe up w or the down x arrow to move the soundtoward the right or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, press and release the AUDIO button untilFAD (fade) displays. Then press and hold either arrow tomove the sound toward the front or the rear speakers.

3-50

To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, selectBAL or FAD. Then press and hold AUDIO for more thantwo seconds until a beep sounds. B (balance) and a zeroor F (fade) and a zero displays.

To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controlsto the middle position, first end out of audio mode bypressing another button, causing the radio to perform thatfunction, or by waiting five seconds for the display toreturn to the time of day. Then press and hold the AUDIObutton for more than two seconds until a beep sounds.CEN displays.

Fade may not be available if the vehicle is a regular cabmodel.

Radio Messages

CAL (Calibration): The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CALdisplays it means that the radio has not been configuredproperly for your vehicle and must be returned to yourdealer/retailer for service.

LOC (Locked): This message displays when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicleto your dealer/retailer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or cannot be corrected,contact your dealer/retailer.

Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.CD displays. If you want to insert a CD with the ignitionoff, first press the eject button or the RCL knob.

If you insert a CD with the radio off and the ignition on,it starts to play.

If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radiois turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped,if it was the last selected audio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberdisplays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) singleCDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and thesmaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

3-51

Care of Your CDsIf playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the qualityof the music that has been recorded, and the way theCD-R has been handled. Handle them carefully.Store CD-R(s) in their original cases or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlight and dust. TheCD player scans the bottom surface of the disc. If thesurface of a CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD does not play properly or notat all. Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up CDsby grasping the outer edges or the edge of the holeand the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free clothor dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergentsolution mixed with water, and clean it. Make sure thewiping process starts from the center to the edge.

Care of Your CD PlayerDo not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in theCD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computerand a description label is needed, try labeling the top ofthe recorded CD with a marking pen.

The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD opticswith lubricants internal to the CD player mechanism.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than oneCD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attemptis made to play scratched or damaged CDs, theCD player could be damaged. While using the CDplayer, use only CDs in good condition without anylabel, load one CD at a time, and keep the CDplayer and the loading slot free of foreign materials,liquids, and debris.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in thissection.

3-52

1 PREV (Previous): Press to go to the beginning of thecurrent track if more than eight seconds have played.The track number displays. If this pushbutton is held orpressed more than once, the player continues movingbackward through the CD.

2 NEXT: Press to go to the next track. The tracknumber displays. If this pushbutton is held or pressedmore than once, the player continues moving forwardthrough the CD.

3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse quicklywithin a track. Release to play the passage. The elapsedtime of the track displays.

4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold to advance quicklywithin a track. Release to play the passage. The elapsedtime of the track displays.

5 RDM (Random): Press to hear the tracks in random,rather than sequential, order. RND displays. Pressagain to turn off random play. OFF displays.

6 RPT (Repeat): Press once to hear a track over again.RPT displays. The current track continues to repeat.Press again to turn off repeat play. OFF displays.

o SEEK p: Press the left or right arrow to go to theprevious or to the next track. The track number displays.If either arrow is held or pressed more than once, theplayer continues moving backward or forward throughthe CD.

RCL (Recall): Press this to see the current tracknumber or how long the current track has been playing.

AM FM: Press to listen to the radio when a CD isplaying. The inactive CD remains inside the radio forfuture listening.

CD: Press to play a CD when listening to the radio.CD displays if a CD is loaded.

Z (Eject): Press to eject a CD. Eject can be activatedwith either the ignition or radio off. CDs may be loadedwith the ignition and radio off if this button is pressed first.

CD MessagesIf the CD comes out, it could be for one of the followingreasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour andtry again.

• There could have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

3-53

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down and provide itto your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.

Playing a Cassette TapeThe tape player is built to work best with tapes that areup to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longerthan that are so thin they might not work well in thisplayer. The longer side with the tape visible should faceto the right. If you hear nothing or hear a garbled sound,the tape might not be in squarely. Press the Z (eject)button to remove the tape and start over.

If the ignition and the radio are off, press the eject buttonor the RCL knob to insert and to begin play of a tape.If the ignition is on and the radio is off, the tape can beinserted and begins playing. CAS (cassette) displayswhen a tape is inserted.

While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIO, andSEEK controls just as you do for the radio. The radiodisplays UP if the top side of the tape is playing.DN (Down) appears if the bottom side is playing.The tape player plays the other side of the tape whenit reaches the end.

Cassette tape adapter kits for portable CD playersworks in the cassette tape player. See “CD Adapter Kits”later for more information.

The tape bias is set automatically when a metal orchrome tape is inserted.

If an error displays, see “Cassette Tape Messages” laterin this section.

1 PREV (Previous): The tape must have at leastthree seconds of silence between each selection forprevious to work. Press this pushbutton to go to theprevious selection on the tape if the current selectionhas been playing for less than three seconds. If pressedwhen the current selection has been playing fromthree to 13 seconds, it goes to the beginning of theprevious selection or the beginning of the currentselection, depending on the position on the tape. Ifpressed when the current selection has been playing formore than 13 seconds, it goes to the beginning of thecurrent selection. Pressing this pushbutton multiple timesincreases the number of selections to be searched back,up to −9. Pressing the NEXT pushbutton cancels theselections.

3-54

2 NEXT: The tape must have at least three seconds ofsilence between each selection for next to work. Pressthis pushbutton to go to the next selection on the tape.Pressing this pushbutton multiple times in the next modeincreases the number of selections to be searchedforward. Pressing the PREV pushbutton cancels theselections.

3 REV (Reverse): Press to quickly reverse the tape.FR displays. The radio plays while the tape reverses.Press it again to return to playing speed. Select stationsduring reverse operation by using the TUNE or SEEKcontrols or by using the scan or preset scan features.

4 FWD (Forward): Press to quickly advance thetape. FF displays. The radio plays while the tapeadvances. Press again to return to playing speed. Selectstations during forward operation by using the TUNEor SEEK controls or by using the scan or presetscan features.

5 SIDE: Press to play the other side of the tape.

6 RPT (Repeat): The tape must have at least threeseconds of silence between each selection for repeat towork. Press and release to hear a selection over again.RPT displays. Press again to turn off repeated play.OFF displays.

o SEEK p: The tape must have at least three secondsof silence between each selection for seek to work. Theleft arrow is the same as the PREV pushbutton and theright arrow is the same as the NEXT pushbutton. If eitherthe left or right arrow is held or pressed more than once,the player continues moving backward or forward throughthe tape.

AM FM: Press to listen to the radio when a tape isplaying. The inactive tape remains inside the radio forfuture listening.

TAPE: Press to play a cassette tape when listening tothe radio. CAS displays when a tape is loaded.

Z (Eject): Press to eject a tape. Eject can beactivated with the radio off. Cassette tapes can beloaded with the ignition and radio off if this button ispressed first.

3-55

Care of the Cassette Tape PlayerA tape player that is not cleaned regularly can causereduced sound quality, ruined cassettes, or a damagedmechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in theircases away from contaminants, direct sunlight andextreme heat. If they are not properly stored, they maynot operate properly or may cause failure of thetape player.

The tape player should be cleaned regularly afterevery 50 hours of use. The radio may display CLN toindicate that the tape player has been used for 50 hourswithout resetting the tape clean timer. If this messageappears on the display, the cassette tape playerneeds to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but it shouldbe cleaned as soon as possible to prevent damageto the tapes and player. If there is a reduction in soundquality, try a known good cassette to see if the tapeor the tape player is at fault. If this other cassette has noimprovement in sound quality, clean the tape player.

For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasivecleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tapehead as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn. Therecommended cleaning cassette is available throughyour dealer/retailer.

The cut tape detection feature of the cassette tape playermay identify the cleaning cassette as a damaged tape.To prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected,use the following steps:

1. Turn the ignition on.2. Turn the radio off.3. Press and hold the TAPE button for two seconds

until the radio produces one beep. CAS will flashon the display for five seconds.

4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s

recommended cleaning time.After the cleaning cassette is ejected, the cut tapedetection feature will be active again.

A non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which uses acassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head can beused. This type of cleaning cassette will not eject on itsown. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may not clean asthoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner. The use of anon-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning cassette is notrecommended.After the player is cleaned, press and hold the ejectbutton for three seconds to reset the CLN indicator. Theradio will display --- to show the indicator was reset.Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality maydegrade over time. Always make sure the cassettetape is in good condition before the tape playeris serviced.

3-56

Cassette Tape Messages

ERR (Error): If the player detects a tight or brokentape, this message displays and the player ejects thetape. The radio goes back to playing the last stationselected.

CLN (Clean): If this message displays, the cassettetape player needs to be cleaned. It still plays tapes, butit should be cleaned as soon as possible to preventdamage to the tapes and player. See “Care of theCassette Tape Player” later in this section.

If the cassette is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good cassette.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot becorrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it down and provide itto your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.

CD Adapter KitsIt is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kitwith the cassette tape player after deactivating thetight/loose tape sensor feature on the tape player.

To deactivate this feature, use the following steps:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Turn the radio off.

3. Press and hold the TAPE button for two secondsuntil one beep is produced. CAS flashes, indicatingthat the TIGHT/LOOSE TAPE sensor feature isno longer active.

4. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot.

The override feature remains active until the Z buttonis pressed.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of thevehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). The radio does not operateif it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.

3-57

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and static can occur duringnormal radio reception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and externalelectronic devices are plugged into the accessorypower outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,especially at night. The longer range can cause stationfrequencies to interfere with each other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stations boost the power levelsduring the day, and then reduce these levels during thenight. Static can also occur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radio reception. When thishappens, try reducing the treble on your radio.

FM StereoFM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals reachonly about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings orhills can interfere with FM signals, causing the soundto fade in and out.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washeswithout being damaged as long as it is securely attachedto the base. If the mast becomes slightly bent, straightenit out by hand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.

Occasionally check to make sure the antenna istightened to its base. If tightening is required, tighten byhand until fully seated plus one quarter turn.

Chime Level AdjustmentThe radio is used to adjust the vehicle’s chime level.To change the volume level of the chime, press and holdpushbutton 6 with the ignition on and the radio poweroff. The volume level will change from the normallevel to loud, and HI will appear on the radio display.To change back to the default or normal setting, pressand hold pushbutton 6 again. The volume level willchange from the loud level to normal, and LO will appearon the radio display. Each time the chime volume ischanged, three chimes will sound as an example of thenew volume selected. Removing the radio and notreplacing it with a factory radio or chime module willdisable vehicle chimes.

3-58

Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ............4-2Driving for Better Fuel Economy .......................4-2Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2Drunk Driving .................................................4-3Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-3Braking .........................................................4-4Hydraulic Brake Systems .................................4-4Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...........................4-5Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-5Trailer Brake Hand Control Valve ......................4-6Rear Axle Differential Lock Control ....................4-7Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-8Steering ........................................................4-9Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-11Passing .......................................................4-11

Loss of Control .............................................4-12Driving at Night ............................................4-13Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-14Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-15Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-16Winter Driving ..............................................4-17If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,

Ice, or Snow .............................................4-19Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-19Tow Hooks ..................................................4-20Loading the Vehicle ......................................4-20Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment .......4-22

Towing ..........................................................4-23Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-23Trailer Connections .......................................4-25

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

4-1

Your Driving, the Road, andthe Vehicle

Driving for Better Fuel EconomyDriving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are somedriving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.

• Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.

• Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.

• Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.

• When road and weather conditions are appropriate,use cruise control, if equipped.

• Always follow posted speed limits or drive moreslowly when conditions require.

• Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.

• Combine several trips into a single trip.

• Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same TPC Specnumber molded into the tire’s sidewall near the size.

• Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “always expect theunexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is towear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are forEveryone on page 1-11.

{CAUTION:

Assume that other road users (pedestrians,bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. In addition:

• Allow enough following distance between youand the driver in front of you.

• Focus on the task of driving.

Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting ininjury or possible death. These simple defensivedriving techniques could save your life.

4-2

Drunk Driving

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Yourreflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgmentcan be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.You can have a serious — or even fatal — collisionif you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive orride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride homein a cab; or if you are with a group, designate adriver who will not drink.

Death and injury associated with drinking and driving isa global tragedy.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive avehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, andattentiveness.

Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,these deaths are the result of someone who was drinkingand driving. In recent years, more than 17,000 annualmotor vehicle-related deaths have been associated withthe use of alcohol, with about 250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is against the law in everyU.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmental reasons forthese laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drink alcohol andthen drive.

Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’ssystem can make crash injuries worse, especiallyinjuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This meansthat when anyone who has been drinking — driveror passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance ofbeing killed or permanently disabled is higher than if theperson had not been drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systems help to control the vehiclewhile driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easyto ask more of those control systems than the tires androad can provide. Meaning, you can lose control ofthe vehicle.

4-3

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 3-31.

Braking action involves perception time and reactiontime. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as two or three seconds ormore with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,drugs and frustration. But even in three-fourths of asecond, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenthe vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatlywith the surface of the road, whether it is pavementor gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dryor icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; theweight of the vehicle; the weight of the load; and theamount of brake force applied.

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavybraking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This isa mistake. The brakes might not have time to coolbetween hard stops. The brakes will wear out muchfaster with a lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the

traffic and allowing realistic following distanceseliminates a lot of unnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven,brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If the brakesare pumped, the pedal could get harder to push down.If the engine stops, there will still be some power brakeassist but it will be used when the brake is applied. Oncethe power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop andthe brake pedal will be harder to push.

Hydraulic Brake SystemsIf the engine stops running, or if the primary brake systemstops working, your vehicle has a reserve power assistsystem to help you slow down. Just slowly and steadilyapply the brake pedal until you can safely get off the road.The pedal will seem harder to push down. Do not pumpthe pedal; the system will not work well that way.

You might find that the steering wheel seems hard toturn when you are turning and braking at the same time.Also, the primary brake warning light might come onand the warning tone might sound. This is normalbecause the main hydraulic brake system and powersteering both use the power steering pump. If this everhappens, let up on the brake pedal a little. Whenyou let up on the brake pedal in that situation, it lets thesteering get a little more help from the pump.

4-4

Antilock Brake System (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), anadvanced electronic braking system that helps prevent abraking skid.

When the engine is started and the vehicle begins todrive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motoror clicking noise might be heard while this test is goingon. This is normal.

If there is a problem withABS, this warning lightstays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS)Warning Light onpage 3-33.

Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slamon the brakes and continue braking. Here is whathappens with ABS:

A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computerwill separately work the brakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, asrequired, faster than any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, the computer keepsreceiving updates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to geta foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stoppingdistance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if thatvehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enoughroom up ahead to stop, even with ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedaldown firmly and let antilock work. The brakes might befelt to pulsate, or the sound of air exhausting mightbe heard if the vehicle has air brakes, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help more thaneven the very best braking.

4-5

Trailer Brake Hand Control ValveIf your vehicle has this feature, the control is mountedon the floor console.

This feature lets you applythe trailer brakes withoutapplying the tractor brakes.

You can apply the trailer brakes a little or apply them allthe way if you have to. Use this control only whenyou are driving. Do not use it for parking or to hold therig on a hill.

{CAUTION:

Using the trailer brake hand control for parking orfor holding the vehicle on a hill may not keep thevehicle from rolling. This can happen if someonehits the valve by accident, or if air pressure bleedsfrom the system. If the vehicle rolls, you or otherscould be injured. To park the vehicle or hold it ona hill, use the parking brake properly.

4-6

Rear Axle Differential Lock Control

If the vehicle has acontrolled traction orlocking differential axle, theswitch is located in thecenter of the instrumentpanel.

This control is on single rear axle vehicles.

If approaching a slippery surface where one or bothwheels may start to slip, press the switch to off. The reardifferential locks so power is transmitted equally toboth rear wheels.

Let up on the accelerator before turning on the rear axledifferential lock.

Notice: Turning on the inter-axle differential lockwhile the rear wheels are spinning freely, asthey might on snow or ice, can damage the axle(s).Turn on this control only while the wheels arenot spinning freely.

Interaxle Differential Lock

This switch is located onthe center instrumentpanel. This control is ontandem rear axle vehicles.

Press the switch to engage/lock the tandem front axledifferential to the rear axle differential. This drivercontrolled feature improves traction over slippery oruneven surfaces.

4-7

Traction Control System (TCS)The vehicle may have a traction control system that limitswheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery roadconditions. The system operates only if it senses that oneor both of the rear wheels are spinning or beginning tolose traction. When this happens, the system applies thebrake(s) at the affected wheel(s).

The bottom light on TCS on/off button will come onwhen the TCS is limiting wheel spin. The system maybe heard or felt while it is working, but this is normal.TCS will function at speeds up to about 25 mph(42 km/h).

TCS may operate on dry roads under some conditions.When this happens, a reduction in acceleration maybe noticed. This is normal and doesn’t mean there’s aproblem with the vehicle. Examples of these conditionsinclude a hard acceleration in a turn, an abruptupshift or downshift of the transmission or driving onrough roads.

When the light in the top of the TCS button is on, TCSis off and will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

The light in the top of the TCS button will come on ifTCS is turned off by pressing the TCS on/off button.

The light may also come on if a problem has beendetected in either the traction control system orthe anti-lock brake system.

The traction control system automatically comes onwhenever the vehicle is started. To limit wheelspin, especially in slippery road conditions, the systemshould always be left on. But the traction controlsystem can be turned off if needed. Turn the system offif the vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud or snowand rocking the vehicle is required. See Rocking YourVehicle to Get It Out on page 4-19 for more information.

4-8

To turn the system on oroff, press the tractioncontrol button located onthe instrument panel.

If the TCS button was used to turn the system off, thelight in the top of the button will come on and stayon. TCS can be turned back on at any time by pressingthe button again; the light should go off.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affectthe vehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 5-3 for more information.

Steering

Power SteeringIf power steering assist is lost because the engine stopsor the system is not functioning, the vehicle can besteered but it will take more effort.

On vehicles with hydraulic brakes, the power steeringand main hydraulic brake system both use thepower steering pump. See Braking on page 4-4.

Steering TipsDriving on CurvesIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tiresand the road surface, the angle at which the curve isbanked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed isthe one factor that can be controlled.

If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before enteringthe curve, while the front wheels are straight.

Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through thecurve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Waitto accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerategently into the straightaway.

4-9

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be more effectivethan braking. For example, you come over a hill and finda truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pullsout from nowhere, or a child darts out from betweenparked cars and stops right in front of you. Theseproblems can be avoided by braking — if you can stopin time. But sometimes you cannot stop in timebecause there is no room. That is the time for evasiveaction — steering around the problem.

The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies likethese. First apply the brakes. See Braking on page 4-4.It is better to remove as much speed as possiblefrom a collision. Then steer around the problem, to theleft or right depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention anda quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at therecommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be turneda full 180 degrees very quickly without removing eitherhand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just asquickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided theobject.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensive drivingat all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-10

Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of aroad onto the shoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off theaccelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of thepavement. Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches,8 to 13 cm, (about one-eighth turn) until the right fronttire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steeringwheel to go straight down the roadway.

PassingPassing another vehicle on a two-lane road can bedangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:

• A vehicle like yours takes a longer time to reachpassing speed, so you will need a longer stretchof clear road ahead than you would with apassenger car.

• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroadsfor situations that might affect a successful pass. Ifin doubt, wait.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, andlines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your sideof the lane.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.

• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.

• When you are being passed, ease to the right.

4-11

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enough frictionwhere the tires meet the road to do what the driver hasasked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steerand constantly seek an escape route or area of lessdanger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions, and by not overdrivingthose conditions. But skids are always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s threecontrol systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are notrolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speedor steering in a curve causes tires to slip and losecornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too muchthrottle causes the driving wheels to spin.

If the vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS),remember: It helps avoid only the acceleration skid.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-8. If thevehicle does not have this system, or if the systemis off, then an acceleration skid is best handledby easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slowdown and adjust your driving to these conditions. It isimportant to slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle control morelimited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, orbraking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting toa lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tiresto slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery untilthe vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warningclues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow onthe road to make a mirrored surface — and slow downwhen you have any doubt.

If the vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS),remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. Ifthe vehicle does not have ABS, then in a braking skid,where the wheels are no longer rolling, releaseenough pressure on the brakes to get the wheels rollingagain. This restores steering control. Push the brakepedal down steadily when you have to stop suddenly. Aslong as the wheels are rolling, you will have steeringcontrol.

4-12

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving becausesome drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol ordrugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.

Night driving tips include:

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the insiderearview mirror.

• Slow down and keep more space between you andother vehicles because headlamps can only light upso much road ahead.

• Watch for animals.

• When tired, pull off the road.

• Do not wear sunglasses.

• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.

• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicleclean — inside and out.

• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns orcurves.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But, as we get older, these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as muchlight to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.

4-13

Driving in Rain and on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reduce vehicle tractionand affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Alwaysdrive slower in these types of driving conditionsand avoid driving through large puddles anddeep-standing or flowing water.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might notwork as well in a quick stop and could causepulling to one side. You could lose control of thevehicle.



After driving through a large puddle of water or acar/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal untilthe brakes work normally.

Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.Driving through flowing water could cause yourvehicle to be carried away. If this happens, youand other vehicle occupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and be very cautious abouttrying to drive through flowing water.

4-14

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up underyour vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road is wet enough andyou are going fast enough. When your vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather TipsBesides slowing down, other wet weather driving tipsinclude:

• Allow extra following distance.

• Pass with caution.

• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.

• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tireson page 5-76.

• Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention to your surroundingswhile driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park your vehicle and rest.

Other driving tips include:

• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.

• Keep interior temperature cool.

• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road aheadand to the sides.

• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instrumentsoften.

4-15

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or through mountains is differentthan driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for drivingin these conditions include:

• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.

• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, coolingsystem, and transmission.

• Going down steep or long hills, shift to alower gear.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, the brakes could get sohot that they would not work well. You would thenhave poor braking or even none going down a hill.You could crash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignitionoff is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all thework of slowing down and they could get so hotthat they would not work well. You would thenhave poor braking or even none going down a hill.You could crash. Always have the engine runningand the vehicle in gear when going downhill.

• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cutacross the center of the road. Drive at speedsthat let you stay in your own lane.

• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in yourlane (stalled car, accident).

• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocksarea, winding roads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and take appropriate action.

4-16

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or IceDrive carefully when there is snow or ice between thetires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet icecan occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rainbegins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoiddriving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerategently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quicklycauses the wheels to spin and makes the surface underthe tires slick, so there is even less traction.

Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate toofast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surfaceunder the tires even more.

For four-wheel-drive vehicles, shift into 4HI. SeeFour-Wheel Drive on page 2-30.

If the vehicle has the Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 4-8, it improves the ability to accelerate onslippery roads, but slow down and adjust your driving tothe road conditions. When driving through deep snow,turn off the traction control system to help maintainvehicle motion at lower speeds.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-5 improvesvehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads,but apply the brakes sooner than when on drypavement.

Allow greater following distance on any slippery roadand watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur onotherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surfaceof a curve or an overpass can remain icy whenthe surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking while on ice.

Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.

4-17

Blizzard ConditionsBeing stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Staywith the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,use the Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-5.To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:

• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6.

• Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:• Clear away snow from around the base of

your vehicle, especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

• Check again from time to time to be suresnow does not collect there.



• Open a window about two inches (5 cm) onthe side of the vehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

• Fully open the air outlets on or under theinstrument panel.

• Adjust the Climate Control system to a settingthat circulates the air inside the vehicle andset the fan speed to the highest setting. SeeClimate Control System in the Index.

For more information about carbon monoxide, seeEngine Exhaust on page 2-45.

Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gasto get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, so you might notknow it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle, especially anythat is blocking the exhaust.

Run the engine for short periods only as needed tokeep warm, but be careful.

To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods asneeded to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine offand close the window most of the way to save heat.

4-18

Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feelreally uncomfortable from the cold. Moving aboutto keep warm also helps.

If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and thenwhen you run the engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idlespeed. This keeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps.Do this as little as possible to save fuel.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowSlowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free thevehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. SeeRocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-19.

If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help tofree a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s tractionsystem in the Index. If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn the traction system offand use the rocking method.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed,they can explode, and you or others could beinjured. The vehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or other damage. Spin thewheels as little as possible and avoid going above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutTurn the steering wheel left and right to clear the areaaround the front wheels. For four-wheel-drive vehicles,shift into 4HI. Turn off any traction system. Shift back andforth between R (Reverse) and a forward gear, or with amanual transmission, between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) andR (Reverse), spinning the wheels as little as possible.To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and press lightly on the acceleratorpedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinningthe wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes arocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does notget the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to betowed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out, seeTowing Your Vehicle on page 4-23.

4-19

Tow Hooks

{CAUTION:

These hooks, when used, are under a lot of force.Always pull the vehicle straight out. Never pull onthe hooks at a sideways angle. The hooks couldbreak off and you or others could be injured fromthe chain or cable snapping back.

Notice: Never use tow hooks to tow the vehicle.Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not becovered by warranty.

If your vehicle has tow hooks, the hooks are at the frontand, on some models, the rear of the vehicle. Youmay need to use them if you are stuck off-road and needto be pulled to some place where you can continuedriving.

Loading the VehicleIt is the responsibility of the Final Stage manufacturer toinstall a Certification label on your vehicle. This labelshows how much weight your vehicle can properly carry.It may also show the size of the vehicle’s original tires,and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the grossweight capacity of your vehicle. This is called the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The tire informationcould also be shown on a separate Tire Information label.

The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, and cargo.

4-20

The Certification label also tells you the maximumweight for the front and rear axles, called the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loadson your front and rear axles, go to a weigh station andweigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread out your load equally on bothsides of the center line.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWRfor either the front or rear axle.

And, if you do have a heavy load, spread it out.

{CAUTION:

Do not load the vehicle any heavier than theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), oreither the maximum front or rear Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on thevehicle can break, and it can change the wayyour vehicle handles. These could cause youto lose control and crash. Also, overloadingcan shorten the life of the vehicle.

Using heavier suspension components to get addeddurability might not change the weight ratings. Ask yourdealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,tools, packages, or anything else — they go as fastas the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,or if there is a crash, they keep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle can strikeand injure people in a sudden stop or turn, orin a crash.

• Put things in the cargo area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so that someof them are above the tops of the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured child restraintin your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded down unlessyou need to.

4-21

Adding a Snow Plow or SimilarEquipmentIf you will be installing a snow plow on your vehicle, werecommend that the vehicle have the snow plowprep package (RPO ANQ). Before installing a snowplow, see your dealer/retailer for information onother recommended optional equipment and vehicleweight restrictions.

Notice: The payload your vehicle can carry will bereduced when a snow plow is installed. Yourvehicle can be damaged if either the front or rearaxle ratings, or the GVW, are exceeded. Seeyour dealer/retailer for more information.

{CAUTION:

On some vehicles that have certain front mountedequipment, such as a snow plow, it may bepossible to load the front axle to the front grossaxle weight rating (GAWR) but not have enoughweight on the rear axle to have proper brakingperformance. If your brakes can not work properly,you could have a crash. To help your brakes workproperly when a snow plow is installed, alwaysfollow the snow plow manufacturer or installer’srecommendation for rear ballast to ensure aproper front and rear weight distribution ratio, eventhough the actual front weight may be less thanthe front GAWR, and the total vehicle weight isless than the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR).Maintaining a proper front and rear weightdistribution ratio is necessary to provide properbraking performance.

4-22

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer/retailer or a professional towingservice to have the vehicle towed. They can provide theright equipment and know-how to tow it withoutdamage. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 7-5.

Releasing Air-Operated Parking BrakesIf the vehicle has air brakes, there could be a specialtowing problem. If the vehicle has to be towed becauseof a complete loss of air pressure from both systems,the parking brakes will have automatically engaged.

The tow operator can release the brakes manually byusing the following steps. Then the vehicle can be towedwith all wheels or only the rear wheels on the ground.

1. Block the wheels of the vehicle.

2. Remove the release stud and nut from the side ofthe brake chamber. Some chambers have studswhich are visible at all times.

4-23

3. Remove the rubbercap from the rear ofthe chamber.

4. Put the release stud, nut and flat washer into thechamber.

5. Turn the stud clockwise a quarter of a turn.

6. Turn the stud nutclockwise several turnsto release the brakes.Follow the sameprocedure to releasethe other brake orbrakes.

7. At the repair facility, apply air pressure of at least70 psi (480 kPa) to the brake chambers, eitherfrom an external air supply or the vehicle’sair system.

8. Turn the stud nut counterclockwise several turns.Remove the stud from the chamber.

9. Replace the stud and washer and tighten the nutinto the side of the chamber.

10. Replace the rubber cap.

4-24

Trailer Connections

Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring PackageThe vehicle may be equipped with an eight-wire trailertowing harness. This harness, with a seven-pin universalheavy-duty trailer connector, is attached to a bracketon the platform hitch.

The Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) wire istied next to the trailer wiring harness for use with atrailer.

The eight-wire harness contains the following trailercircuits:

• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal

• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal

• Brown: Taillamps

• White: Ground

• Light Green: Back-up Lamps

• Light Blue: CHMSL

• Red: Battery Feed

• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake

Trailer Connections(C7/C8 Models Only)If the vehicle has these trailer connections, they arelocated at the rear of the cab for a tractor and at the rearof the chassis when towing a trailer. There will be anair connection and an electrical connection.

Be sure that the couplings to the trailer are madecorrectly.

Air ConnectionsIf the trailer air line connections will not be connected toanother piece of equipment, be sure to replace theirprotective caps.

Electrical ConnectionsThis system is a seven-wire cable that will connect tothe trailer, supplying power to the trailer’s lightingsystem. When not in use, it is stored in the trailerair-hose storage bracket.

4-25

✍ NOTES

4-26

Service ............................................................5-3Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-4California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .....5-4Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-5Engine Fan Breakage .....................................5-6

Fuel ................................................................5-6Gasoline Octane ............................................5-6Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-7Additives .......................................................5-7Diesel Engine Fuel .........................................5-8What Fuel to Use ...........................................5-8Very Cold Weather Operation .........................5-11Water in Fuel ...............................................5-11Running Out of Fuel .....................................5-17Fuel Filter Replacement .................................5-18Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................5-19Filling the Tank ............................................5-20Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-22

Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-22Hood Latches ...............................................5-23Engine Oil (DURAMAX Diesel Engine) .............5-24Engine Oil (Caterpillar Diesel Engine) ..............5-27Engine Oil (Isuzu Diesel Engine) .....................5-28Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) ..........................5-32Engine Oil Life System (Gasoline Engine) ........5-35

Engine Oil Life System (DURAMAX/IsuzuDiesel Engines) .........................................5-36

Engine Oil Life System (CaterpillarDiesel Engine) ..........................................5-38

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-38Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-42Manual Transmission Fluid .............................5-42Cooling System ............................................5-43Engine Coolant (Caterpillar Diesel Engines) ......5-47Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-47Engine Overheating .......................................5-48Engine Fan Noise .........................................5-49Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-49Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-50Brakes ........................................................5-52Battery ........................................................5-61Jump Starting ...............................................5-62

Rear Axle .......................................................5-67Rear Axle Shift Motor ....................................5-68

Four-Wheel Drive ............................................5-68Front Axle ......................................................5-69Noise Control System .....................................5-70

Tampering with Noise Control SystemProhibited .................................................5-70

Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-71

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-1

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-71Other Service Items ........................................5-72

Fuel Filter ....................................................5-72Primary Fuel Filter and Water Separator ..........5-73Secondary Fuel Filter and Water Separator/

Heater (Caterpillar Diesel) ............................5-74Front Wheel Bearings with

Oil-Filled Hubs ..........................................5-75Tires ..............................................................5-76

Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-77Wheel Loading .............................................5-78Dual Tire Operation .......................................5-78When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-78Buying New Tires .........................................5-79Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-80Tightening the Wheel Nuts .............................5-80Wheel Replacement ......................................5-84If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-85

Appearance Care ............................................5-87Interior Cleaning ...........................................5-87Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-88Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ........................................5-89Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-89Weatherstrips ...............................................5-89Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-90

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-90Finish Care ..................................................5-90Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-91Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels

and Trim ..................................................5-92Tires ...........................................................5-92Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-93Finish Damage .............................................5-93Underbody Maintenance ................................5-93Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-93

Vehicle Identification ......................................5-94Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-94Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-94

Electrical System ............................................5-95Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-95Headlamp Wiring ..........................................5-95Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-95Fusible Links ................................................5-95Power Windows and Other Power Options ..........5-96Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-96Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..........................5-96Underhood Fuse Block ..................................5-99

Capacities and Specifications ........................5-102Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .........5-108

Maintenance Replacement Parts ...................5-108Engine Drive Belt Routing ............................5-110

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-2

ServiceFor service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Accessories and ModificationsAdding non-dealer accessories to the vehicle can affectits performance and safety. Such things as airbags,braking, stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems likeanti-lock brakes, traction control, and stability controlcould be affected. Some non-dealer accessories couldeven cause malfunction or damage to parts and systemsand would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle components resulting from theinstallation or use of non-GM certified parts, includingcontrol module modifications, are not covered under theterms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remainingwarranty coverage for affected parts.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on the vehicle. Your GMdealer can accessorize the vehicle using genuineGM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer andask for GM Accessories, you will know that GM-trainedand supported service technicians will perform thework using genuine GM Accessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 1-58.

5-3

Aftermarket Engine PerformanceEnhancement Products andModificationsSome aftermarket engine performance products andmodifications promise a way to increase the horsepowerand torque levels of the vehicle’s powertrain. You shouldbe aware that these products could have harmful effectson the performance and life of the engine, exhaustemission system, transmission, and drivetrain. Theengines, transmissions, and drivetrains have beendesigned and built to offer industry leading durability andperformance in the most demanding applications. Enginepower enhancement products may enable the engine tooperate at horsepower and torque levels that coulddamage, create failure, or reduce the life of the engine,engine emission system, transmission, and drivetrain.Damage, failure, or reduced life of the engine,transmission, emission system, drivetrain, or othervehicle components caused by aftermarket engineperformance enhancement products or modificationsmight not be covered under the vehicle warranty.

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/oremit chemicals known to the State of California to causecancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (includingsome inside the vehicle), many fluids, and somecomponent wear by-products contain and/or emitthese chemicals.

California Perchlorate MaterialsRequirementsCertain types of automotive applications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteriescontained in remote keyless transmitters, may containperchlorate materials. Special handling may benecessary. For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

5-4

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and the vehicle could bedamaged if you try to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacement parts, andtools before attempting any vehiclemaintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, andother fasteners. English and metric fastenerscan be easily confused. If the wrong fastenersare used, parts can later break or fall off. Youcould be hurt.

If doing some of your own service work, use the properservice manual. It tells you much more about how toservice the vehicle than this manual can. To orderthe proper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 7-10.

This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting todo your own service work, see Servicing YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-58.

Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileageand the date of any service work performed. See PartD: Maintenance Record on page 6-33.

5-5

Engine Fan Breakage

{CAUTION:

Changing the Fan Drive Ratio or Engine GovernedSpeed:

If you change the fan drive ratio or increase thegoverned speed of the engine, you might increasestress and the fan could eventually fail. If the fanbreaks apart while rotating, pieces can causesevere injury to anyone — such as a servicetechnician — who is nearby. And, of course, thepieces can severely damage the vehicle. Do notchange the fan drive ratio or increase thegoverned speed of the vehicle without getting thenecessary information from your dealer/retailer.

Winter Fronts, Grille Covers, or Obstructions:Winter Fronts, grille covers, or other add-onequipment causing obstructions in front of orbehind the fan should not be used on this vehicle.If this causes the fan to eventually break apartwhile rotating, the pieces can cause severe injuryto anyone nearby, such as a service technicianworking on the engine, and, of course, the piecescan severely damage the vehicle.

FuelFor diesel engine vehicles, see Diesel Engine Fuel onpage 5-8.

For vehicles with gasoline engines, please read this.

Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of theproper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep theengine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance,we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octanerating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,you might notice an audible knocking noise when youdrive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If thisoccurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher assoon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, theengine needs service.

5-6

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specificationD 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 inCanada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use ofgasolines containing MMT. See Additives on page 5-7for additional information.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United Statesare now required to contain additives that help preventengine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowingthe emission control system to work properly. In mostcases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.However, some gasolines contain only the minimumamount of additive required to meet U.S. EnvironmentalProtection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectorsand intake valves clean, or if the vehicle experiencesproblems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.For customers who do not use TOP TIER DetergentGasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engineoil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectorsand intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS isthe only gasoline additive recommended by GeneralMotors.

Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will helpcorrect and prevent most deposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers andethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available inyour area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,if they comply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containingmore than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles thatwere not designed for those fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel thatcontains methanol. Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions can contain an octane-enhancing additivecalled methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasolinewhether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend againstthe use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT canreduce the life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system could be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,return to your dealer/retailer for service.

5-7

Diesel Engine FuelFor the Caterpillar® diesel, see the Caterpillar®

Operation & Maintenance Manual for informationconcerning fuel usage.

Notice: Diesel fuel or fuel additives notrecommended in this manual could damage the fuelsystem and engine. Your warranty would notcover this damage. And:

• Diesel fuel that has been mixed with engine oilor automatic transmission fluid could damagethe engine and emission controls.

• We do not test aftermarket diesel fuel additives.Some additives, particularly those whichcontain alcohol or water emulsifiers, coulddamage the fuel system. If you believe thatunique circumstances call for a fuel additive tobe used, consult your dealer/retailer foradvice.

• If you ever run out of diesel fuel, it can bedifficult to restart the engine. To avoid this,never let the tank get empty.

If gasoline is ever accidentally added to the fueltank, to avoid severe engine damage, do not run theengine until the fuel tank can be drained.

If you run out of fuel, Running Out of Fuel on page 5-17tells you how to restart the engine.

What Fuel to UseNotice: Use of diesel fuel other than Ultra LowSulfur Diesel (15 ppm sulfur maximum) or engine oilother than low ash CJ-4 oil will cause permanentdamage to the DPF and related components. Thisdamage would not be covered by your warranty.

The emission control system requires the use of dieselfuel with ultra low-sulfur (0.0015% by weight, or 15 ppm,maximum) content. Both Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel and LowSulfur Diesel fuels are available in the United States andUltra Low Sulfur Diesel fuel is available in Canada. InMexico, Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel fuel is not available in allregions.

At a minimum, the diesel fuel you use should meet thelatest version of ASTM specification D 975 (GradesNo. 2-D or No. 1-D S15 commonly known as Ultra LowSulfur diesel) in the United States. In addition, theEngine Manufacturers Association (EMA) has identifiedproperties of an improved diesel fuel for better engineperformance and durability. Diesel fuels corresponding tothe EMA Recommended Guideline on Premium DieselFuel (FQP-1A) could provide better starting, less noise,and better vehicle performance. If there are questionsabout the fuel you are using, contact your fuel supplier.

5-8

In the United States, for best results use No. 2-D dieselfuel year-round (above and below freezing conditions) asoil companies blend No. 2-D fuel to address climatedifferences. No. 1-D diesel fuel can be used in very coldtemperatures (when it stays below 0°F or −18°C);however, it will produce a power and fuel economy loss.Avoid the use of No. 1-D diesel fuel in warm or hotclimates. It can result in stalling, poor starting when theengine is hot, and could damage the fuel injectionsystem.

It is acceptable to use diesel fuel containing up to5% biodiesel (B5), but the final blended fuel must meetthe same specification, ASTM D 975 (Grades No. 2-D orNo. 1-D S15 commonly known as Ultra Low Sulfurdiesel), as other fuels used in your vehicle, and thebiodiesel used for making this fuel must meet the latestversion of ASTM specification D 6751. Biodiesel isproduced from vegetable oils or animal fat that have beenchemically modified to reduce the possibility of damageto the fuel system and engine. Higher concentration (i.e.,greater than B5) biodiesel-containing fuels or the useof unmodified bio-oils blended into diesel fuel at anyconcentration is not recommended and could damage thefuel system and engine. Such damage would not becovered by your warranty. If there are questions aboutthe biodiesel-containing fuels you are using, contact yourfuel supplier.

Because of the cleansing properties of biodiesel,switching from straight diesel to a biodiesel blend canprematurely restrict the fuel filter with normal deposits inthe fuel system. A fuel filter replacement might berequired sooner than the recommended interval.

Diesel fuel can foam when you fill the tank. This cancause the automatic pump nozzle to shut off, eventhough the tank is not full. If this happens, just wait forthe foaming to stop and then try filling the tank moreslowly. See Filling the Tank on page 5-20.

{CAUTION:

Heat coming from the engine can cause the fuel toexpand and force the fuel out of the tank. Ifsomething ignites the fuel, a fire could start andpeople could be burned. To help avoid this, tryfilling the tank more slowly and fill the fuel tankonly until the automatic nozzle shuts off. Do not tryto top it off.

5-9

What Fuel to Use in Canada

Notice: Use of diesel fuel other than Ultra LowSulfur Diesel (15 ppm sulfur maximum) or engine oilother than low ash CJ-4 oil will cause permanentdamage to the DPF and related components.This damage would not be covered by yourwarranty.

The emission control system requires the use of dieselfuel with ultra low-sulfur (0.0015% by weight, or 15 ppm,maximum) content. Both Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel and LowSulfur Diesel fuels are available in the United States andUltra Low Sulfur Diesel fuel is available in Canada. InMexico, Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel fuel is not available in allregions.

At a minimum, the diesel fuel you use should meet thelatest version of specification CAN/CGSB-3.517 (ULS)in Canada. In addition, the Engine ManufacturersAssociation (EMA) has identified properties of animproved diesel fuel for better engine performance anddurability (FQP-1A). Diesel fuels corresponding to theEMA description could provide better starting, less noise,and better vehicle performance. If there are questionsabout the fuel you are using, contact your fuel supplier.

Canadian fuels are blended for seasonal changes.Diesel Type “A” fuel is blended for better cold weatherstarting (below 0°F or −18°C); however, you might noticesome power and fuel economy loss. If Type “A” fuel isused in warmer temperatures, stalling and hardstarting may occur. Diesel Type “B” fuel is blended fortemperatures above 0°F (−18°C).

It is acceptable to use diesel fuel containing up to5% biodiesel (B5), but the final blended fuel must meetthe same specification, CAN/CGSB-3.517 (ULS) inCanada, as other fuels used in your vehicle, and thebiodiesel used for making this fuel must meet the latestversion of ASTM specification D 6751. Biodiesel isproduced from vegetable oils or animal fat that havebeen chemically modified to reduce the possibilityof damage to the fuel system and engine. Higherconcentration (i.e., greater than B5) biodiesel-containingfuels or the use of unmodified bio-oils blended intodiesel fuel at any concentration is not recommended andcould damage the fuel system and engine. Suchdamage would not be covered by your warranty. If thereare questions about the biodiesel-containing fuels youare using, contact your fuel supplier.

5-10

Very Cold Weather OperationFollow the instructions listed previously under theheading “What Fuel to Use.”

Notice: Never use home heating oil or gasoline inyour vehicle’s diesel engine. They can causeengine damage.

In cold weather, the fuel filter could become clogged(waxed). To unclog it, move the vehicle to a warmgarage area and warm the filter to between 32°F and50°F (0°C to 10°C). You will not need to replace it.Additional information on the fuel filter follows.

Water in Fuel

{CAUTION:

Diesel fuel containing water is still flammable. Youcould be burned. If you ever try to drain waterfrom the fuel, keep sparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from the mixture.

Notice: If there is water in the diesel fuel and theweather is warm or humid, fungus and bacteria cangrow in the fuel. They can damage the fuel system.A diesel fuel biocide can be used to sterilize thefuel system. However, the fuel system may still needto be cleaned. Your dealer/retailer can advise youof the appropriate solution.

If the fuel tank needs to be purged to remove water,see your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician.Improper purging can damage the fuel system.

Sometimes, water can be pumped into the fuel tankalong with the diesel fuel. This can happen if a servicestation does not regularly inspect and clean its fueltanks, or if it gets contaminated fuel from its suppliers.

If this happens, thewater-in-fuel light, ifequipped, will come on inthe instrument panel. If itdoes, the water must bedrained. Your dealer/retailer can show youhow to do this.

If the light comes on, use this chart to determine whataction to take.

5-11

Water In Fuel LightProblem Recommended Action

Light comes onintermittently.

Drain water from the fuelfilter.

Light stays on attemperatures above

freezing.

Drain the fuel filterimmediately. If no watercan be drained and thelight stays on, see your

dealer/retailer forassistance.

Light stays on attemperatures below

freezing.

Drain the fuel filterimmediately. If no watercan be drained, watermay be frozen in the

water drain system, or inthe fuel lines. Move the

vehicle to a warm locationto thaw out, and thendrain the filter system.

Light stays onimmediately after

refueling, and a largeamount of water was

possibly pumped into thefuel tank.

Fuel tank purging isrequired. See yourdealer/retailer for

assistance.

Notice: Driving when this warning indicator is on,can damage the fuel injection system and the engine.If the indicator comes on right after a refuel, it meanswater was pumped into the fuel tank. Turn off theengine immediately. Then, have the water drainedat once.

To drain water, do the following:

1. Stop and park the vehicle in a safe place. Turn offthe engine and apply the parking brake.

2. Remove the fuel cap.

3. Place a fuel-resistant container under the fuel filter.The filter drain valve is located on the bottom of thefuel filter.If the vehicle has the 6.6L engine, the fuel filter islocated in the engine compartment on the driver sideof the vehicle. If the vehicle has either the 7.2L or7.8L engine, the fuel filters are located in the enginecompartment on the driver side of the vehicle, and onthe driver side frame rail in front of the fuel tank.

5-12

4. Open the drain valveby turning two to threeturns. When fuelempties from the valve,all the water hasbeen drained. Closethe valve hand-tight.

5. Remove the fuel-resistant container and properlydispose of the contaminated fuel. To find out how toproperly dispose of contaminated diesel fuel, seeEngine Oil (DURAMAX Diesel Engine) on page 5-24or Engine Oil (Caterpillar Diesel Engine) onpage 5-27 or Engine Oil (Isuzu Diesel Engine) onpage 5-28 or Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) onpage 5-32.

6. Install the fuel cap.

7. Start the engine and let it run for a few minutes.If the engine stalls, the fuel system may need tobe primed. While draining the water from thefuel filter, air may enter the fuel system. If air hasentered the fuel system, the fuel system will needto be primed.

If the water-in-fuel light comes on again after driving ashort distance or the engine runs rough or stalls, a largeamount of water has probably been pumped into thefuel tank. The fuel tank should be purged.

Fuel PrimingIf the vehicle has a Caterpillar® diesel engine, see theCaterpillar® Diesel Engine Operation and MaintenanceManual provided with the vehicle.

If the vehicle has a DURAMAX® diesel engine, in orderfor the fuel system to work properly, the fuel linesmust be full of fuel and contain no air. If air gets into thefuel lines, it will be necessary to prime the fuel linesto eliminate air before operating the vehicle.

5-13

Air can get into the fuel lines if any of the followinghappen:

• The vehicle runs out of fuel.

• The fuel filter is removed for servicing orreplacement.

• The fuel lines are removed or disconnected forservicing.

• The fuel filter water drain valve is opened while theengine is running.

If one or more of the above occurred, it is very likelythat air has entered the fuel system and the fuel systemneeds to be primed before operating the vehicle.

Air in the fuel lines will not harm the engine or thevehicle. However, the engine may not be able to startuntil the fuel system is primed and the air is removed.

Priming the 6.6L Duramax® Diesel EngineIf the vehicle is equipped with the 6.6L Duramax® dieselengine, it has a priming pump which is part of the enginemounted fuel filter. The vent valve and the fuel filterprimer pump are located on top of the fuel filter housing.The priming pump is hand operated and is designed tobring fuel to the engine to eliminate any air in the fuellines.

To prime the 6.6L Duramax® diesel engine, do thefollowing:

1. Make sure there is fuel in the tank.

2. Make sure the fuel filter had been installed andproperly tightened.

3. Make sure the fuel lines are properly connectedand the fuel filter is cool enough to touch.

4. Remove any dirt from the fuel filter head and ventvalve by wiping with a cloth.

5-14

5. Open the fuel filter ventvalve by turning thescrew counterclockwiseseveral full turns.

6. Repeatedly push downon the fuel filter primerpump with the palm ofyour hand. Let thepump return upwardbetween pushes.

7. Operate the priming pump until a small amount offuel seeps from the vent valve. When fuel is seen,the filter is full of fuel and the system should beprimed.

8. Close the vent valve.

9. Clean any fuel that accumulated on the fuel filter.

10. Start the engine and let it idle for a few minutes.

11. Check the filter for leaks.

5-15

Priming the 7.8L Duramax® Diesel EngineIf the vehicle is equipped with the 7.8L Duramax® dieselengine, use the following procedure to prime the engine:

1. Make sure there is fuel in the fuel tank.

2. Make sure the specified fuel filter is properlyinstalled.

3. Make sure the fuel lines are securely connected.

4. Make sure the fuel filter is cool to the touch.

5. Use a clean cloth to remove dirt and oil from thefuel filter head and breather valve.

6. Use the palm of your hand to repeatedly pressand release the plunger at the top of the fuel filterpriming pump. Continue until the plunger resistancebecomes firm. This may take from 20 to 100 times,depending upon fuel tank location.

7. Turn the fuel filter breather valve screwcounterclockwise several turns to open thebreather valve.

8. Use the palm of your hand to repeatedly press andrelease the plunger at the top of the fuel filterpriming pump until fuel begins to seep from thebreather valve.

9. Tighten the fuel filter breather screw to the specifiedtorque, 4.9 Y (43 lbs. in.).

10. Use the palm of your hand to press and release theplunger at the top of the fuel filter priming pumpabout 20 more times. This sends fuel to the engine.

11. Use a clean cloth to remove any fuel from the fuelfilter and surrounding area.

12. Start the engine and allow it to idle for a fewminutes.

13. Check the fuel filter for leakage.

5-16

Running Out of FuelIf the diesel engine stalls and you think that you haverun out of fuel, do this to restart the engine:

{CAUTION:

Diesel fuel is flammable. It could start a fire if itgets on hot engine parts. You could be burned. Donot let too much fuel flow from the air bleed valve,and wipe up any spilled fuel with a cloth.

1. If parked on a level surface, add at least 2 gallons(7.6 liters) of fuel. However, if parked on a slope, upto 5 gallons (18.9 liters) of fuel might need to beadded.

2. Follow the fuel priming procedure earlier in thissection to prime the fuel filter.

3. Close the air bleed valve.

4. Turn the ignition key to START for 10 to 15 secondsat a time until the engine starts. If the engine triesto run, but does not run smoothly, increase the rpma little using the accelerator pedal. This will helpforce air through the system.

The service engine soon light may come on if thevehicle has run out of fuel. This light may stay on for afew drive cycles after the condition is corrected, butwill eventually clear itself.

5-17

Fuel Filter ReplacementIf you want to change the diesel engine fuel filteryourself, here is how to do it:

{CAUTION:

Diesel fuel is flammable. It could start a fire ifsomething ignites it, and you could be burned.Do not let it get on hot engine parts, and keepmatches or other ignition sources away.

First, drain any water from the filter by following thewater draining procedure earlier in this section.

The vehicle’s engine should be off until the end of thisprocedure.

If the vehicle has the 6.6L engine, the fuel filter is locatedin the engine compartment on the driver side of thevehicle. If the vehicle has either the 7.2L or 7.8L engine,the fuel filters are located in the engine compartmenton the driver side of the vehicle, and on the driver sideframe rail in front of the fuel tank.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Unplug the watersensor wire connectedto the fuel filter andunscrew the filterelement.

3. Remove the filter element. If there is any dirt on thefilter sealing surface, clean it off. Remove and reusethe water sensor float switch located on the bottom ofthe fuel filter.

5-18

4. Install the new filter element.

5. Reinstall and tighten the filter container andreconnect the water sensor wire to the filter.

6. Use the fuel filter priming procedure earlier in thissection to prime the fuel filter.

7. Tighten the air bleed valve by turning it clockwiseuntil hand-tight.

8. Start the engine and let it idle for five minutes.Check the fuel filter and air bleed valve for leaks.

How to Reset Fuel Filter ChangeLight - DURAMAX 6.6L (LMM) EngineThe engine controller calculates when to change the fuelfilter based on vehicle and fuel use. Whenever thefuel filter is changed, reset the fuel filter light sothe engine controller can calculate when the next fuelfilter change is required. If the fuel filter is ever changedprior to a change fuel filter light being turned on,reset the fuel filter change light.

To reset the Fuel Filter Change light:

1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN with the engine off

2. Fully press the accelerator and brake pedals at thesame time for 10 seconds. If the Fuel Filter Changelight flashes for 5 seconds, the system is resetting.

3. Turn the key to OFF.

If the Fuel Filter Change light comes back on when youstart the vehicle, the light has not been reset. Repeatthe procedure. See Change Fuel Filter Warning Light onpage 3-45 for more information.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outside theUnited States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hardto find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuelnot recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costlyrepairs caused by use of improper fuel would notbe covered by the vehicle warranty.To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

5-19

Filling the Tank{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor is highly flammable. It burns violently,and that can cause very bad injuries. Do notsmoke if you are near fuel or refueling the vehicle.Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials awayfrom fuel.

The fuel cap can be on either or both sides of thevehicle depending on option content.

To take off the cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.Fuel caps for allgasoline applications,and all diesel between

frame rail fuel tankapplications

Fuel caps for all sidemounted diesel

applications

5-20

{CAUTION:

If you get fuel on yourself and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuel canspray out on you if you open the fuel cap tooquickly. This spray can happen if the tank is nearlyfull, and is more likely in hot weather. Open thefuel cap slowly and wait for any “hiss” noise tostop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

When reinstalling the cap, turn it clockwise until it istight.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to getthe right type. Your dealer/retailer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fitproperly. This may cause the malfunction indicatorlamp to light and may damage the fuel tank andemissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 3-36.

If the vehicle has dual tanks, fill the driver side tank,or forward tank, first. The fuel gage will give betterreadings this way. The gage will show the total fuel leftin both tanks.

If the vehicle is a C4/C5 model and has dual tanks, theengine must be off when refueling or the fuel transfersystem may become inoperable.

If the vehicle has a single tank with dual fillers, wherethere is a filler on each side of the vehicle, do notattempt to fill the tank through both fillers at the sametime. Do not fill the tank with both caps removed orover-filling the tank and fuel spillage can result.

5-21

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in thevehicle. Static electricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuel vapor. You can bebadly burned and the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense fuel only into approved containers.• Do not fill a container while it is inside a

vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or onany surface other than the ground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the insideof the fill opening before operating the nozzle.Contact should be maintained until the fillingis complete.

• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.• Do not use a cellular phone while

pumping fuel.

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engine parts andstart a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and otherfluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others couldbe burned. Be careful not to drop or spill thingsthat will burn onto a hot engine.

5-22

Hood Latches

To tilt the hood forward, pull back and up on each of thehood latches, located above the wheel wells on bothsides of the vehicle.

Then take the hand hold and pull the hood forward.

When you tilt the hood far enough, there are cables thatwill support it. When you close the hood, make sureboth latches are secured.

5-23

Engine Oil (DURAMAX DieselEngine)

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil level every timeyou get fuel.

The engine oil dipstick islocated in the enginecompartment on the driverside of the vehicle.

In order to get an accurate reading, the engine shouldbe at normal operating temperature, so that the oilis warm, and the vehicle must be on level ground.

1. If the engine is at normal operating temperature andthe oil is warm, turn off the engine and allow atleast five minutes for the oil to drain back into theoil pan. If you do not do this, the oil dipstickmight not show the actual level.If the engine has not been run long enough to bring itup to normal operating temperature and the oil iscool, turn off the engine and allow 30 minutes for theoil to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.

5-24

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towelor a cloth, then push it back in all the way.

3. Remove the dipstick again, keeping the tip down,and check the oil level.

When to Add Engine OilIf the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tipof the dipstick, add at least two quarts/liters ofthe recommended oil. This section explains what kindof oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications on page 5-102.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets above thecross-hatched area that shows the proper operatingrange, the engine could be damaged.

Add oil at the engine oil fillcap in the enginecompartment. Install andfully tighten the fill capwhen you are through.

Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the properoperating range. Push the dipstick all the way back inwhen you are through.

5-25

What Kind of Engine Oil to UseLook for three things:

• CJ-4

Oils designated as API CJ-4 are required for thevehicle. The CJ-4 designation can appear either aloneor in combination with other American PetroleumInstitute (API) designations, such as API CJ-4/SL.These letters show API levels of quality.

• SAE 15W-40

SAE 15W-40 is best for the vehicle. When it is verycold, below 0°F (−18°C), use SAE 5W-40 to improvecold starting. These numbers on the oil containershow its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 10W-30, SAE 10W-40, orSAE 20W-50.

5-26

• American Petroleum Institute (API) symbol

This doughnut-shaped logo(symbol) is used on mostoil containers to help youselect the correct oil. Itmeans that the oil has beencertified by the AmericanPetroleum Institute.

Look for this on the oil container, and use onlythose oils that display this logo.

Notice: Use only engine oils that have thedesignation CJ-4 for the diesel engine. Failure touse the recommended oil can result in enginedamage not covered by the vehicle warranty.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommended oilswith the API service symbol are all you need forgood performance and engine protection.

When to Change Engine Oil (VehiclesWithout the Engine Oil Life System)Change the engine oil and filter every 15,000 miles(24 000 km), or every 12 months, or every 750 hours ofengine operation, whichever occurs first. SeeScheduled Maintenance on page 6-5.

Engine Oil (Caterpillar DieselEngine)See the Caterpillar® Operation & Maintenance Manualfor information on oil quality and viscosities as wellas the temperature range chart.

5-27

Engine Oil (Isuzu Diesel Engine)

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil level every timeyou get fuel.

The engine oil dipstick islocated in the enginecompartment on the driverside of the vehicle.

In order to get an accurate reading, the engine shouldbe at normal operating temperature, so that the oilis warm, and the vehicle must be on level ground.

1. If the engine is at normal operating temperature andthe oil is warm, turn off the engine and allow atleast five minutes for the oil to drain back into theoil pan. If you do not do this, the oil dipstickmight not show the actual level.If the engine has not been run long enough to bringit up to normal operating temperature and the oilis cool, turn off the engine and allow 30 minutes forthe oil to drain back into the oil pan. If you donot do this, the oil dipstick might not show the actuallevel.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towelor a cloth, then push it back in all the way.

3. Remove the dipstick again, keeping the tip down,and check the oil level.

5-28

When to Add Engine Oil

Notice: Do not add too much oil. Keep the oil levelbetween the ADD (C) and FULL (B) marks on thedipstick. Under normal engine operation, the engineoil level can increase above the FULL (B) mark asa result of DPF regeneration. A small increase in theoil level is normal. If the engine has so much oilthat the oil level reaches the wider portion (A) on thedipstick, the engine oil must be changed as soonas possible or the engine could be damaged.

If the oil is below the ADDmark (C) on the dipstick,add at least one quart/literof the recommended oil.

This section explains what kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 5-102.

Add oil at the engine oil fillcap in the enginecompartment. Install andfully tighten the fill capwhen you are through.

Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the properoperating range. Push the dipstick all the way back inwhen you are through.

5-29


• CJ-4

Oils designated as API CJ-4 are required for thevehicle. The CJ-4 designation can appear either aloneor in combination with other American PetroleumInstitute (API) designations, such as API CJ-4/SL.These letters show API levels of quality.

• SAE 10W-40 or SAE 15W-40

SAE 10W-40 or SAE 15W-40 is best for thevehicle. When it is very cold, below 0°F (−18°C), useSAE 5W-40 to improve cold starting. These numberson the oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 10W-30or SAE 20W-50.

5-30

• American Petroleum Institute (API) symbol

This doughnut-shaped logo(symbol) is used on mostoil containers to help youselect the correct oil. Itmeans that the oil has beencertified by the AmericanPetroleum Institute.

Look for this on the oil container, and use onlythose oils that display this logo.

Notice: Use only engine oils that have thedesignation CJ-4 for the diesel engine. Failure touse the recommended oil can result in enginedamage not covered by the vehicle warranty.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommended oilswith the API service symbol are all you need forgood performance and engine protection.

When to Change Engine Oil (VehiclesWithout the Engine Oil Life System)Change the engine oil and filter every 15,000 miles(24 000 km), or every 12 months, or every 750 hours ofengine operation, whichever occurs first. If the vehicleis used primarily for long trip, highway service, changethe engine oil and filter every 18,000 miles (28 800 km),or every 12 months, or every 750 hours of engineoperation, whichever occurs first. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-5.

5-31

Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)

If the low oil light appearson the instrument cluster,check the engine oillevel right away.

For more information, see Low Oil Level Light onpage 3-39. You should check the engine oil levelregularly; this is an added reminder.

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every time youget fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oilmust be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick islocated in the enginecompartment on thedriver’s side of the vehicle.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutesto drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towelor cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove itagain, keeping the tip down, and check the level.

5-32

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of thedipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the recommendedoil. This section explains what kind of oil to use. Forengine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 5-102.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets above thecross-hatched area that shows the proper operatingrange, the engine could be damaged.

The engine oil fill cap islocated near the engineoil dipstick in the enginecompartment, on the driverside of the vehicle.

Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the properoperating range in the cross-hatched area. Push thedipstick all the way back in when you are through.

5-33


• GM6094M

Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numberson an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol

Oils meeting theserequirements should havethe starburst symbol on thecontainer. This symbolindicates that the oil hasbeen certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and showing the AmericanPetroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. Failure to use the recommendedoil can result in engine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Cold Temperature OperationIf in an area of extreme cold, where the temperaturefalls below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provideeasier cold starting for the engine at extremely lowtemperatures. Always use an oil that meets the requiredspecification, GM6094M. See “What Kind of EngineOil to Use” for more information.

5-34

Engine Oil Additives / Engine OilFlushesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommended oilswith the API service symbol are all that is neededfor good performance and engine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are not recommended andcould cause engine damage not covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Engine Oil Life System (GasolineEngine)

When to Change Engine OilThis vehicle has a computer system that indicates whento change the engine oil and filter. This is based onengine revolutions and engine temperature, and not onmileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage atwhich an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.For the oil life system to work properly, the systemmust be reset every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life has beendiminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.A change engine oil light comes on. See Change

Engine Oil Light on page 3-39. Change the oil as soonas possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). Itis possible that, if driving under the best conditions, theoil life system might not indicate that an oil changeis necessary for over a year. However, the engine oiland filter must be changed at least once a year and atthis time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailerhas trained service people who will perform thiswork using genuine parts and reset the system. It isalso important to check the oil regularly and keep it atthe proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must bechanged at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oilchange. Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when to changethe engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Wheneverthe oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculatewhen the next oil change is required. If a situation occurswhere the oil is changed prior to a change engine oil lightbeing turned on, reset the system.

5-35

To reset the change engine oil light:

1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN with theengine off.

2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowlythree times within 10 seconds.If the change engine oil light flashes forfive seconds, the system is resetting.


If the change engine oil light comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil life system has notreset. Repeat the procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that can beunhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Cleanyour skin and nails with soap and water, or a goodhand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing orrags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from thefilter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting itin the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or intostreams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to aplace that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System(DURAMAX/Isuzu Diesel Engines)

When to Change Engine OilIf the vehicle has the Engine Oil Life System, it has acomputer system that indicates when to changethe engine oil and filter. This is based on injection timing,engine load, and engine temperature, and not onmileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage atwhich an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.For the oil life system to work properly, the systemmust be reset every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life has beendiminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.A change engine oil light comes on. See Change EngineOil Light on page 3-39. Change the oil as soon aspossible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km) or 30 hoursof engine operation, whichever occurs first. It is possiblethat, if driving under the best conditions, the oil life systemmight not indicate that an oil change is necessary for overa year. However, the engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and at this time the systemmust be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained servicepeople who will perform this work using genuine partsand reset the system. It is also important to check the oilregularly and keep it at the proper level.

5-36

If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must bechanged at 15,000 miles (24 000 km), or 150 hoursof engine operation, whichever occurs first, since the lastoil change. Remember to reset the oil life systemwhenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when to changethe engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Wheneverthe oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculatewhen the next oil change is required. If a situation occurswhere oil is changed prior to a change engine oil lightbeing turned on, reset the system.

To reset the Engine Oil Life System:


2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowlythree times within five seconds.If the change engine oil light is turned off, thesystem is resetting.


If the change engine oil light comes back on when thevehicle is started, the Engine Oil Life System hasnot reset. Repeat the procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that can beunhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Cleanyour skin and nails with soap and water, or a goodhand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing orrags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from thefilter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting itin the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or intostreams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to aplace that collects used oil.

5-37

Engine Oil Life System (CaterpillarDiesel Engine)

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when to changethe engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Wheneverthe oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculatewhen the next oil change is required. If a situation occurswhere the oil is changed prior to a change engine oil lightbeing turned on, reset the system.

To reset the Engine Oil Life System:


2. Fully apply and hold the brake pedal while fullypressing and releasing the accelerator pedal,pausing slightly at each press and each release,three times within five seconds.


If the change engine oil light comes back on when thevehicle is started, the Engine Oil Life System hasnot reset. Repeat the procedure.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

Duramax Diesel 6.6LEngine

V8 Gas, Caterpillar andIsuzu 6H Diesel

Engines

5-38

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filters

For vehicle with this feature, the engine air filter lifegage will be located in the engine compartment eitheron or near the air cleaner or above the switchbank in thecenter of the instrument panel. It monitors the engineair filter and indicates when the filter should be replaced.If driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filtereach oil change.

As the filter gets dirty, the yellow indicator begins torise. When it reaches the red/orange change area,replace the filter. Reset the indicator after each filterreplacement, refer to Air Filter Restriction Indicatoron page 3-46.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter (Duramax Diesel6.6L Engine)

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter offcan cause you or others to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stopflames if the engine backfires. If it is not there andthe engine backfires, you could be burned. Do notdrive with it off, and be careful working on theengine with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire cancause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily getinto the engine, which will damage it. Always havethe air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.

The engine air cleaner/filter is located in the center ofthe engine compartment.

To inspect the engine air cleaner/filter, remove the filterfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt,a new filter is required.

5-39

How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filters (Gas V8 8.1L, Caterpillar 7.2L andIsuzu 7.8L Diesel Engines)

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter offcan cause you or others to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stopflames if the engine backfires. If it is not there andthe engine backfires, you could be burned. Do notdrive with it off, and be careful working on theengine with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire cancause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily getinto the engine, which will damage it. Always havethe air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.

The engine air cleaner/filter is located in the center ofthe engine compartment.

To inspect the engine air cleaner/filter:1. Disconnect the air

compressor hose bypinching the connectorring to release theconnector lock.

2. Unclip the four clips that hold the upper housing tothe lower housing and remove the upper housing.

3. Remove the filter from the vehicle and lightly shakethe filter to release loose dust and dirt. If the filterremains caked with dirt, a new filter is required.

4. Reinstall the upper housing and make sure that theair compressor hose is reconnected by pushing theconnector back onto the port. Listen for theconnector to click to be sure that the air compressorhose is securely locked and connected.

Isuzu 7.8L Diesel Only

5-40

Hood Inlet SealIf the vehicle is being used in heavy snow conditions orfor snow plowing, there is a possibility of snow andice build up in the inlet to the air cleaner, whichcan block airflow to the engine and affect impactingengine performance.

To prevent this from happening, remove the hoodinlet seal:

1. Loosen the clamp that holds the seal to the aircleaner.

2. Slide the seal off.

3. Store the seal in the inlet, located on the undersideof the hood.

4. Store the air cleaner clamp on the coolant surgetank. Pull the overflow tube out of the white plasticretainer, slip the clamp over and reinstall the hose.

Replace the air cleaner seal during non-snow or non-icyconditions.

5-41

Automatic Transmission Fluid

When to CheckA good time to check your automatic transmission fluidlevel is when the engine oil is checked. See yourAllison Automatic Transmission Operator’s Manual tofind out when to change your transmission fluidand filters.

How to Check and What to UseThe Allison Automatic Transmission Operator’s Manualthat came with the vehicle shows how to check theautomatic transmission fluid and what fluid to use.

Automatic Transmission External FilterYour automatic transmission filter requires periodicreplacement.

Consult the Allison Automatic Transmission Operator’sManual that came with the vehicle for proper changeintervals.

Manual Transmission Fluid

When to CheckA good time to have it checked is when the engine oil ischecked. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to find outwhen to check and change your manual transmissionfluid. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-5.

How to Check and What to UseCheck the fluid level only when your engine is off, thevehicle is parked on a level place, and the transmissionis cool enough for you to rest your fingers on thetransmission case.

To check the transmission fluid level, do the following:

1. Remove the filler plug.

2. Check to be sure that the lubricant level is upto the bottom of the fill opening. On heavy dutytransmissions, an inch of oil level equals aboutone gallon of fluid.

3. If the fluid level is good, reinstall the plug and besure it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, addmore fluid as described in the next steps. Refer tothe Maintenance Schedule to determine whatkind of fluid to use. See Part C: RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-31.

5-42

How to Add FluidTo add transmission fluid, do the following:

1. Remove the filler plug.

2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enoughfluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of thefill opening. Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine the proper fluid to use. See PartC: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 6-31.

3. Reinstall the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fullyseated.

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is whatyou will see:

A. Engine FanB. Coolant Surge Tank

If your vehicle has a Caterpillar® diesel engine, see theCaterpillar® Diesel Engine Operation and MaintenanceManual provided with your vehicle.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, donot do anything else until it cools down. The vehicleshould be parked on a level surface.

5-43

The coolant level shouldbe at the FULL COLDmark or higher. If it is not,you may have a leak atthe pressure cap or in theradiator hoses, heaterhoses, radiator, waterpump, or somewhere elsein the cooling system.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, youcan be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you runthe engine, it could lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and you could be burned.Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again. Theengine cooling fan speed should increase when idlespeed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down.If it does not, your vehicle needs service. Turn off theengine.

Notice: Engine damage from running the enginewithout coolant is not covered by the warranty.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL cancause premature engine, heater core or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the engine coolant mayrequire changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairswould not be covered by the vehicle warranty.Always use DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant inyour vehicle.

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge TankIf you have not found a problem yet, check to see ifcoolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not at the FULL COLD markor higher, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable waterand DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank,but be sure the cooling system, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it.See Engine Coolant (Caterpillar Diesel Engines) onpage 5-47 for more information.

5-44

If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant asfollows:

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot coolingsystem can blow out and burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turn the coolant surgetank pressure cap — even a little — they cancome out at high speed. Never turn the cap whenthe cooling system, including the coolant surgetank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and coolant surge tank pressure cap tocool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to the cooling system canbe dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquidsuch as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolantmixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning systemis set for the proper coolant mixture. With plainwater or the wrong mixture, the engine could gettoo hot but you would not get the overheatwarning. The engine could catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture ofclean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crackthe engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.Use the recommended coolant and the propercoolant mixture.

5-45

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hotengine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol andit will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Donot spill coolant on a hot engine.

1. You can remove thecoolant surge tankpressure cap whenthe cooling system,including the coolantsurge tank pressurecap and upper radiatorhose, is no longer hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwiseabout one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that tostop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, andremove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,to the FULL COLD mark.

5-46

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, startthe engine and let it run until you can feel the upperradiator hose getting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fan.By this time, the coolant level inside the coolantsurge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, addmore of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tankuntil the level reaches slightly above the FULLCOLD mark.

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.

Engine Coolant (Caterpillar DieselEngines)If your vehicle has a Caterpillar® diesel engine, see theCaterpillar® Diesel Engine Operation & MaintenanceManual provided with your vehicle to find out what to add,as well as when and how to service your cooling system.

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure CapThe coolant surge tank pressure cap is located inthe engine compartment, on the driver’s side of thevehicle.

Notice: Your vehicle’s surge tank pressure cap isdesigned for use with medium-duty cooling systemsonly. If the surge tank pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible engine damagemay occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightlysecured.

5-47

Engine OverheatingYou will find an engine coolant temperature gage, aswell as a low coolant warning light, on your vehicle’sinstrument panel. See Engine Coolant TemperatureGage on page 3-34 and Low Coolant Warning Light onpage 3-35 for more information.

Your vehicle also has a check gages warning light onthe instrument panel. See Check Gages WarningLight on page 3-43 for more information.

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burn youbadly, even if you just open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hear steam comingfrom it. Just turn it off and get everyone awayfrom the vehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolant before youopen the hood.



If you keep driving when your engine is overheated,the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others couldbe badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.

Notice: If the engine catches fire because of beingdriven with no coolant, your vehicle can be badlydamaged. The costly repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineAn overheat warning, along with a low coolant light, canindicate a serious problem. See Low Coolant WarningLight on page 3-35 for more information.

If you get an engine overheat warning with no lowcoolant light, but see or hear no steam, the problem maynot be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get alittle too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

5-48

If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off theroad, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and letthe engine idle.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fanspeed and open the windows as necessary.

3. If climbing a hill, downshift to raise engine and fanspeeds.

If you no longer have the overheat warning, you candrive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.If the warning does not come back on, you can drivenormally.

If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pullover, stop, and park your vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam, you can push down theaccelerator until the engine speed is about twice asfast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes whileyou are parked. If you still have the warning, turn offthe engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until itcools down.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to get servicehelp right away.

Engine Fan NoiseYour vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. Whenthe clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to providemore air to cool the engine. In most everyday drivingconditions, the clutch is not fully engaged. This improvesfuel economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavyvehicle loading, trailer towing and/or high outsidetemperatures, the fan speed increases when the clutchengages. So you may hear an increase in fan noise.This is normal and should not be mistaken as thetransmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is merelythe cooling system functioning properly. The fan willslow down when additional cooling is not required andthe clutch disengages.

You may also hear this fan noise when you start theengine. It will go away as the fan clutch disengages.

Power Steering FluidSee Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-5 to determinewhen to check your power steering fluid.

5-49

How To Check Power Steering FluidCheck your power steering fluid only when the engine iswarm. If the engine is not warm, you probably will notget an accurate reading.

If the fluid level is between the MIN (Minimum) andMAX (Maximum) marks, you have enough. If you needfluid, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring itin between the MIN and MAX marks.

If your power steering fluid level is low, this can causethe brake or service brakes soon warning lights to comeon. In addition, the steering effort and emergencybrake distance could increase.

If either light remains on after you have added powersteering fluid to the proper level, then shut off the enginefor 10 seconds. This should reset the brake warninglights. If one or both lights stay on, see “Hydraulic BrakeSystem Warning Lights” under Brake System WarningLight on page 3-31 for more information.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, see Part C:Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-31.

Notice: When adding power steering fluid ormaking a complete fluid change, always use theproper fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid cancause leaks and damage hoses and seals.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to readthe manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you willbe operating your vehicle in an area where thetemperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection against freezing.

5-50

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full.

The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in theengine compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

Notice:

• When using concentrated washer fluid, followthe manufacturer’s instructions for addingwater.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solution to freeze anddamage your washer fluid tank and other partsof the washer system. Also, water does notclean as well as washer fluid.

• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters fullwhen it is very cold. This allows for fluidexpansion if freezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in yourwindshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’swindshield washer system and paint.

5-51

Brakes

Brake Fluid

If the vehicle has hydraulicbrakes, there is a brakemaster cylinder in theengine compartment on thedriver side of the vehicle.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whento check the brake fluid.

{CAUTION:

Do not add brake fluid before checking the level orthere could be too much brake fluid. Brake fluidcould spill on the hot engine and it can catch fire.You could be burned and the vehicle could bedamaged. See “Checking Brake Fluid” in thissection.

Checking Brake FluidApply the brake pedal several times with the ignition off.The brake fluid reservoir is in the engine compartment onthe driver side of the vehicle. Clean one of the reservoircaps and the area around the cap, and remove it.

5-52

The fluid level should beeven with the bottom ring ofthe filler opening. If it is low,add enough fluid to fill thereservoir to the properlevel.

What to AddUse the proper fluid listed in the Maintenance Schedule.Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap/cover and thearea around the cap/cover before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulicsystem, the brakes might not work well. This couldcause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.

Notice:

• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brakehydraulic system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, such as engineoil, in the brake hydraulic system can damagebrake hydraulic system parts so badly that theywill have to be replaced. Do not let someoneput in the wrong kind of fluid, and do notuse DOT-5 silicone brake fluid.

• If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s paintedsurfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Becareful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle.If you do, wash it off immediately. See WashingYour Vehicle on page 5-90.

5-53

Four-Wheel Disc Brakes(Hydraulic Only)The vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brakesqueal when the brakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not mean something is wrong withthe brakes.

Brake linings should always be replaced as completeaxle sets.

Four-Wheel and Six-Wheel DrumBrakes (Air Only)The brake drums should be removed and inspectedeach time the tires are removed for rotation or changing.When the front brakes are replaced, have the rearbrakes inspected, too.

Brake linings should always be replaced as completeaxle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does notreturn to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign that brake servicemight be required.

Brake AdjustmentEvery brake stop, the brakes adjust for wear.

Brake Adjustment on Air Braked VehiclesThe vehicle has automatic slack adjusters. Everybrake stop, the brakes automatically adjust for wear.Slack adjusters should never be manually adjustedto correct excessive brake chamber pushrod stroke.Excessive brake chamber pushrod stroke meansthat the brake system needs to be serviced by aqualified service technician.

Notice: Do not manually adjust automatic slackadjusters. Manual adjustment of the automatic slackadjusters can result in a degradation of the slackadjuster performance over time. If the brakechamber pushrod stroke is out of adjustment, thebrake system needs to be serviced by a qualifiedservice technician.

5-54

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its manyparts have to be of top quality and work well together ifthe vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehiclewas designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.When parts of the braking system are replaced — forexample, when the brake linings wear down and newones are installed — be sure to get new approvedreplacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example, if someone puts in brakelinings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balancebetween the front and rear brakes can change — for theworse. The braking performance expected can change inmany other ways if the wrong replacement brake partsare installed.

Hydraulic Brake PadsBrake pad lining life will vary depending onvehicle application, working environment, equipmentmaintenance, and style of driving. The brake pad liningwear rate has to be monitored for individual drivinghabits — original equipment linings have mechanicalwear indicators to help with this. When down to the last10% of the brake lining, the brake lining wear indicatorrubs on the rotor, causing a scratching or chirpingsound. When this sound is heard, service to the brakepads is needed. See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 6-5.

Aftermarket brake linings might not meet the samestringent requirements as the original equipment linings.Using aftermarket brake linings can affect brakingperformance, pedal feel, noise, and lining wear.

5-55

Air Brake SystemsIf the vehicle has air brakes, it is important to get rid ofmoisture in the system. Moisture will damage the systemif it is not removed daily.

There are two ways to do this. One is automatic throughthe air brake vehicle’s air dryer with integral automaticmoisture ejector that purges air from the system througha self-contained reservoir. The other way to drainmoisture from the air brake system is to manually activatedrain valves at each reservoir. Drain the air reservoirsoccasionally to be sure the air dryer is working properly.

Drain the air brakes at full system pressure. To be sure offull pressure, check the air pressure gage. It should readat least 100 psi (692 kPa).

Air DryerIf the vehicle has air brakes, it has an air dryer mountedon the passenger side frame rail. This collects andremoves dirt, moisture, or other foreign matter from theair prior to entering the brake system. The dryer alsoacts as a moisture ejector. It automatically ejectsthe moisture when the compressor cycles. The purgetank has a manual drain valve that must be drainedevery day. See “Air Brake Systems” for the manual drainprocedure.

The dryer has a filter that needs changing at intervals.See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-5 for more aboutservicing this filter.

5-56

Electric Air CompressorThe vehicle might have an electric air compressor.This compressor is used to run options that requirepressurized air, such as an air horn or air seat.

The air compressor is used when vehicles do not havean air brake system.

The air supply for thissystem must bemaintained by releasingthe drain valve to eject anymoisture that could havebuilt up in the system.

It is recommended that this system be drained on aweekly basis.

Clutch Pedal Free TravelIf the vehicle has a V8 engine and a manualtransmission, the clutch needs adjustment when pedalfree travel gets down to about 1/4 inch (6 mm), asmeasured at the clutch pedal pad. There should be1 1/2 to 2 inches (38 to 51 mm) of clutch pedalfree travel.

If the clutch ever needs service, be sure to use onlyapproved clutch replacement parts.

Chassis LubricationThe Maintenance Schedule provides all of the requiredchassis lubrication intervals and identifies properlubricants to use. Be sure to see the MaintenanceSchedule before performing any chassis lubricationservice. To determine location of chassis lubricationitems, use the following charts.

5-57

Single Axle Models

Item Number Item Remarks1 Brake Camshaft** One fitting each (apply sparingly).2 Steering Column Slip Joint* One fitting.3 Steering Drag Link Ends One fitting each end.

5-58

Item Number Item Remarks4 Pivot Points and Hinges Apply chassis lubricant.5 Pivot Points and Hinges Apply chassis lubricant.6 Slack Adjuster** One fitting.

7 Brake Cam Roller Pins at interface of pinand shoe** Apply engine oil.

8 Front Steering KnucklesOne fitting each side, lower bushing.

(Hand-operated grease gun only.) Hand-pack upperbearing.

9 Front Wheel Bearings Hand-pack or lubricate.10 Steering Tie Rod Ends One fitting each end.11 Spring Slip Pads* (Multi-Leaf Only) Apply chassis lubricant.12 Clutch Release Bearing* Cup or fitting.13 Battery Terminal (except “ST” type) Keep coated with petroleum jelly.14 Transmission Fill to level of filler plug.

15 Propshaft U-Joints Lubricate with GM Part No. 1051344 Wheel BearingLubricant.

16 Parking Brake Clevis Pin$ Apply chassis lubricant.17 Parking Brake Lever Pivot*, $ Apply chassis lubricant.

18 Clutch Release Cross Shaft, MasterCylinder$

Apply chassis lubricant, fill to 1/4 inch (6 mm) belowopening.

19 Release Bearing, Clutch Cross Shaft Two fittings, apply chassis lubricant.20 Clutch Release Fork Two fittings.

* Applies to some vehicles.** Applies to air brakes only.$ Applies to hydraulic brakes only.

5-59

Tandem Axle Models ItemNumber Item Remarks

1 Brake Camshafts One fitting each.

2 Propshaft U-Joint

One fittingeach joint.

Lubricate with GMPart No. 1051344,

Wheel BearingLubricant.

3 Rear Axles Fill to level offiller plug.

4 Brake ShoeRoller Pins

Apply engine oilat pin to shoe

joint only.

5 Rear Spring Pin One fittingeach side.

5-60

BatteryThis vehicle has two or more maintenance free batteries.When it is time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailerfor one that has the replacement number shown onthe original battery’s label.Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of California to causecancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands afterhandling.

Vehicle Storage

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas thatcan explode. You can be badly hurt if you are notcareful. See Jump Starting on page 5-62 for tipson working around a battery without getting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: If the vehicleis driven infrequently,remove the black, negative (−) cable from each battery.This helps keep the batteries from running down.

Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle,remove the black, negative (−) cable from each battery oruse a battery trickle charger. This helps maintain thecharge of the batteries over an extended period of time.

When ready to use the vehicle again, refer to the enginestarting procedure in the Index.

5-61

Jump StartingIf the vehicle’s battery (or batteries) has run down, youmay want to use another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the followingsteps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerousbecause:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.• They contain enough electricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly, some orall of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costlydamage to the vehicle that would not be coveredby the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damage the vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-voltbattery (or batteries) with a negative groundsystem.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-voltsystem with a negative ground, both vehicles canbe damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.

If you have a diesel engine vehicle with two batteries(or more), you should know before you begin that,especially in cold weather, you may not be able to getenough power from a single battery in anothervehicle to start your diesel engine.If your vehicle has more than one battery, use theone closest to the starter — this will reduce electricalresistance.

5-62

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cablescan reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touchingeach other. If they are, it could cause a groundconnection you do not want. You would not be ableto start your vehicle, and the bad grounding coulddamage the electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set theparking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in thejump start procedure. Put an automatic transmissionin P (PARK) or a manual transmission in N (Neutral)before setting the parking brake. If you have afour-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer caseis in a drive gear, not in N (Neutral).

Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessorieson during the jump starting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would not be covered by thewarranty. Always turn off the radio and otheraccessories when jump starting the vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplugunnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarettelighter or accessory power outlets. Turn off theradio and all lamps that are not needed. This willavoid sparks and help save both batteries, andit could save the radio!

4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate thepositive (+) and the negative (−) terminal locationson that vehicle.

Open the hood on yourvehicle and find the remotepositive (+) terminal,located under a red plasticcover on the passenger’sside of the vehicle.Squeeze the tab to openthe cover and access theremote positive (+)terminal.

You will not see the battery (or batteries) of yourvehicle under the hood. They are located in a framemounted battery box, which is located on eitherthe driver’s or the passenger’s side of the vehicle.You will not need to access your battery (orbatteries) for jump starting. The remote positive (+)terminal is for that purpose.

5-63

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can cause batterygas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight ifyou need more light.

Be sure the batteries have enough water. You donot need to add water to the ACDelco® battery (orbatteries) installed in your new vehicle. But if abattery has filler caps, be sure the right amount offluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care ofthat first. If you do not, explosive gas could bepresent.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flush the place withwater and get medical help immediately.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts can injure youbadly. Keep your hands away from moving partsonce the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose ormissing insulation. If they do, you could get ashock. The vehicles could be damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+) will go topositive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or youwill get a short that would damage the batteryand maybe other parts too. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal onthe dead battery because this can cause sparks.

5-64

6. Connect the redpositive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal ofthe dead battery. Use aremote positive (+)terminal if the vehiclehas one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it tothe positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use aremote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use aremote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything until the nextstep. The other end of the negative (−) cable doesnot go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part or to the remotenegative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the deadbattery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable atleast 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,but not near engine parts that move. The electricalconnection is just as good there, and the chanceof sparks getting back to the battery is much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and runthe engine for a while. Use the high idle option ifyour vehicle is equipped with it.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needsservice.

5-65

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shorting mayoccur and damage the vehicle. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always connectand remove the jumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that the cables do not toucheach other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or RemoteNegative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, dothe following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the othervehicle.

5. Return the positive (+) remote terminal cover to itsoriginal position.

Jumper Cable Removal

5-66

Rear AxleWhen to Check and Change LubricantRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinehow often to check the lubricant and when to change it.See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-5.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through deepwater that is higher than the front or rear axle, watermay enter the axle housing and cause the axlelubricant to break down. This could damagethe gears inside. Avoid driving your vehicle throughdeep water.

You should avoid driving your vehicle through deeppuddles or standing water. If you must drive throughwater that is higher than the front or rear axle, see yourdealer immediately afterward to have the condition ofthe axle lubricant checked.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on alevel surface.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,located on the rear axle, you’ll need to add somelubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the filler plug hole.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whatkind of lubricant to use. See Part C: RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-31.

5-67

Rear Axle Shift Motor

When to Check and Change FluidIf you have an optional air-shift two-speed, controlledtraction, or locking differential type rear axle, a good timeto check the fluid level in the axle shift motor is whenthe rear axle lubricant is checked.

How to Check FluidRemove the plug on the front plate of the axle shiftmotor, add enough fluid to raise the level to the bottomof the filler plug hole, then replace the plug.

What to UseRefer to your Maintenance Schedule to determine whatkind of lubricant to use. See Part C: RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-31.

Four-Wheel DriveTransfer Case

When to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check transfer case fluidunless you suspect there is a leak or you hear anunusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.Have it inspected and repaired.


A. Fill PlugB. Drain Plug


If the level is below the bottom of the fill plug hole,located on the transfer case, you’ll need to add somelubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level tothe bottom of the fill plug hole. Use care not toovertighten the plug.

5-68

When to Change LubricantRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine howoften to change the lubricant. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-5.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine whatkind of lubricant to use. See Part C: RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-31.

Front AxleWhen to Check LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluidunless you suspect there is a leak or you hear anunusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.Have it inspected and repaired.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through deep waterthat is higher than the front or rear axle, water mayenter the axle housing and cause the axle lubricant tobreak down. This could damage the gears inside.Avoid driving your vehicle through deep water.




If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,you may need to add some lubricant.

Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom ofthe filler plug hole.

What to UseTo determine what kind of lubricant to use see Part C:Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-31.

5-69

Noise Control System

Tampering with Noise ControlSystem ProhibitedThe following information relates to compliance withfederal noise emission standards for vehicles with aGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of more than10,000 lbs (4 536 kg). The Maintenance Scheduleprovides information on maintaining the noise controlsystem to minimize degradation of the noise emissioncontrol system during the life of your vehicle. The noisecontrol system warranty is given in your warranty booklet.

These standards apply only to vehicles sold in theUnited States.

Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causingthereof:

1. The removal or rendering inoperative by any person,other than for purposes of maintenance, repair orreplacement, of any device or element of designincorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose ofnoise control, prior to its sale or delivery to theultimate purchaser or while it is in use; or

2. The use of the vehicle after such device or elementof design has been removed or rendered inoperativeby any person.

Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering arethe acts listed below.

Insulation:• Removal of the noise shields or any underhood

insulation.

Engine:• Removal or rendering engine speed governor, if the

vehicle has one, inoperative so as to allow enginespeed to exceed manufacturer specifications.

Fan and Drive:• Removal of fan clutch, if the vehicle has one, or

rendering clutch inoperative.

• Removal of the fan shroud, if the vehicle has one.

Air Intake:• Removal of the air cleaner silencer.• Modification of the air cleaner.

Exhaust:• Removal of the muffler or resonator.• Removal of the exhaust pipes and exhaust pipe

clamps.

• Removal of the DOC converter, the DieselParticulate Filter, or the diesel exhaust gas coolerdevice.

5-70

Bulb ReplacementIt is recommended that all bulbs be replaced by yourdealer/retailer.

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected at leasttwice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper BladeCheck” under At Least Twice a Year on page 6-27 formore information.

Replacement blades come in different types and areremoved in different ways.

Here’s how to remove the wiper blade:

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from thewindshield.

5-71

2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assemblytoward the driver side of the vehicle.

3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.

Other Service Items

Fuel Filter

Fuel Filter/Pressure Regulator(Gasoline Engines)The steel fuel filter/pressure regulator is located nearthe engine compartment on the driver’s side frame rail.If your vehicle has a rear steel fuel tank, the fuelfilter/pressure regulator is located near the rear fueltank, on the driver’s side frame rail. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-5 for recommended serviceintervals.

If your vehicle is equipped with the optional Davcospin-on type filter, it is located on the driver’s sideframe rail.

Fuel Filter (Diesel Engines)If you have a diesel engine, your fuel filter is located inthe engine compartment on the driver’s side of thevehicle, or along the driver’s side frame rail. See “FuelFilter Replacement” earlier in this section for furtherinformation.

Also see Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-5 forrecommended service intervals.

5-72

Primary Fuel Filter and WaterSeparator

Your vehicle may have thisspin-on filter. It is locatedon the driver’s sideframe rail.

It has a clear plastic drain bowl at the bottom. Checkthe drain bowl occasionally for any water or particles.

To drain the water or to replace the element, follow thewater draining and element replacement procedureunder Water in Fuel on page 5-11.

Secondary Fuel Filter and HeaterYour vehicle may have this fuel filter and fuel heater.It is mounted on the left side of the engine.

It has a metal drain bowl at the bottom. Occasionally,check the bowl for any water or particles. To checkor drain the bowl, shut off the engine.

Then push up on the spring-loaded drain valve untilclear fuel is flowing from the valve. The particlesor water will drain out first.

5-73

Secondary Fuel Filter and WaterSeparator/Heater (Caterpillar Diesel)

If you have a Caterpillar®

diesel engine, you may alsohave this spin-on filter andfuel separator/heater. It willbe mounted in the enginecompartment on thedriver’s side of the vehicle.

It has a metal drain bowl at the bottom. Occasionally,check the bowl for any water or particles.

To check or drain the bowl, do the following:

• Shut off the engine.

• Push up on the spring loaded drain valve until clearfuel is flowing from the valve.

The particles or water will drain out first. See Engine Oil(DURAMAX Diesel Engine) on page 5-24 or EngineOil (Caterpillar Diesel Engine) on page 5-27 or EngineOil (Isuzu Diesel Engine) on page 5-28 or EngineOil (Gasoline Engine) on page 5-32 for proper disposalprocedures.

5-74

Front Wheel Bearings withOil-Filled HubsNotice: If you drive your vehicle through deep waterthat is higher than the front or rear axle, water mayenter the axle housing and cause the axle lubricant tobreak down. This could damage the gears inside.Avoid driving your vehicle through deep water.


If your vehicle has oil-filledhubs, occasionally check tosee if they have enough oil.You can tell if there is oilthere by using the circulargage on the sight glass.

If there isn’t, clean the rubber fill plug in the center ofthe glass, and then remove it. Be careful not to allowany dirt or water to get into the oil. Add enough of therecommended oil to bring it up to the level mark thatyou’ll see on the glass.

Refer to your Maintenance Schedule for the proper oilto use.

When you fill the hub, check the glass again after drivinga short distance. It takes a while for the oil to flow throughthe system, and you may find that you have to add a littlemore to fill it to the proper level. Be sure not to overfillthe hub.

5-75

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty bookletfor details. For additional information refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly used tiresare dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tires cancause overheating as a result of toomuch flexing. You could have an air-outand a serious accident. See Loading theVehicle on page 4-20.



• Underinflated tires pose the same dangeras overloaded tires. The resulting accidentcould cause serious injury. Check all tiresfrequently to maintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressure should bechecked when your vehicle’s tires arecold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-77.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured, or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit a pothole.Keep tires at the recommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If thetire’s tread is badly worn, or if yourvehicle’s tires have been damaged,replace them.

5-76

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure to operateeffectively. The Certification or Tire Information labelshows the correct inflation pressures for your tireswhen they are cold. Cold means your vehicle has beensitting for at least three hours or driven no more than1 mile (1.6 km).

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing• Too much heat• Tire overloading• Premature or irregular wear• Poor handling• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear• Poor handling• Rough ride• Needless damage from road hazards

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more.

Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire if yourvehicle has one.

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your vehicle’s tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when they areunderinflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle has beensitting for at least three hours or driven no more than1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Pressthe tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressuremeasurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matchesthe recommended pressure on the Certification or TireInformation label, no further adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach therecommended amount. If you overfill the tire, release airby pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tirevalve. Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.

5-77

Wheel LoadingWheels are stamped with a maximum load and coldinflation rating. Be sure you do not exceed these limits.

Dual Tire OperationWhen the vehicle is new, check the wheel nut tightnesson all wheels with a torque wrench after your first100 miles (160 km) and then 1,000 miles (1 600 km) afterthat. Whenever a wheel, wheel bolt or wheel nut isremoved or serviced, repeat the 100 miles (160 km), andthen 1,000 mile (1 600 km) wheel nut tightness check.

See Tightening the Wheel Nuts on page 5-80 for wheelnut tightening information and proper torque values.

{CAUTION:

If you operate your vehicle with a tire that is badlyunderinflated, the tire can overheat. An overheatedtire can lose air suddenly or catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Be sure all tires (includingthe spare, if any) are properly inflated.

See Tires on page 5-76 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 5-77 for more information on proper tire inflation.

When It Is Time for New TiresVarious factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions,influence when you need new tires.

Replace your tires when the tread depth is down to1/8 of an inch (3.2 mm) for the front tires, or 1/16 of aninch (1.6 mm) for a rear tire. Also, you need a newtire if:

• You can see cord or fabric showing through thetire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage thatcannot be repaired well because of the size orlocation of the damage.

The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they arenot being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if yourvehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast thisaging takes place, including temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. Withproper care and maintenance tires will typically wear outbefore they degrade due to age. If you are unsure aboutthe need to replace your tires as they get older, consultthe tire manufacturer for more information.

5-78

If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, the axle differentials,propshafts, and transfer case may be damaged if tiresof different sizes, brands or tread types are installedon the front and rear axles. That damage would not becovered under your warranty.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tires for yourvehicle. If you need replacement tires, GM stronglyrecommends that you get tires that are the same size,brand, load range, speed rating, and construction type(radial and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s originaltires. This way, your vehicle will continue to have tiresthat are designed to give the same performance andvehicle safety, during normal use, as the original tires.

GM recommends replacing tires in sets of six or eight asapplicable. This is because uniform tread depth on alltires will help keep your vehicle performing most like it didwhen the tires were new. Replacing less than a full set oftires can affect the braking and handling performance ofyour vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to lose controlwhile driving. If you mix tires of differentsizes, brands, or types (radial and bias-beltedtires) the vehicle may not handle properly,and you could have a crash. Using tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types may alsocause damage to your vehicle. Be sure touse the correct size, brand, and type of tireson your vehicle’s wheels.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, thewheel rim flanges could develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tire and/or wheelcould fail suddenly, causing a crash. Useonly radial-ply tires with the wheels on thevehicle.

5-79

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe wheels on your vehicle were aligned at thefactory to give you the longest tire life and best overallperformance.

Proper front wheel alignment must be maintained inorder to ensure efficient steering, good directionalstability, and prevent abnormal tire wear. If you noticeunusual tire wear or your vehicle is pulling one wayor the other, the alignment may need to be reset. If younotice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your wheels may need to be balanced.

Tightening the Wheel Nuts

{CAUTION:

Wheel nuts that are not tight can work loose. If allthe nuts on a wheel come off, the wheel can comeoff the vehicle, causing a crash. All wheel nutsmust be properly tightened. Follow the rules in thissection to be sure they are.

This section lets you know how often to check thetightness of the wheel nuts on your vehicle and how tightthey must be.

5-80

First, use these pictures to decide what kind of wheelsyou have.

Then, refer to the following steps for the wheelsyou have.

Hub-Piloted Wheels, 8-Hole or 10-HoleThe studs and nuts used with these wheels haveright-hand threads.

1. With intermittent pilot pads, position a pad at12 o’clock to center the wheel and reduce run-out.

2. Put the tire and rim assembly on the axle hub.Install the outer rear tire and rim assembly sothat its valve stem is exactly opposite the valve stemon the inner tire and rim assembly.

3. Put on the wheel nuts.

4. Finger-tighten the nuts.

5. Oil the surfaces (B)between the nuts (C)and washers (A). Donot oil the studs or thethreads of the nut.

Hub-Piloted Type,8-Hole

Hub-Piloted Type,10-Hole

5-81

6. Tighten the nuts to 400 lb ft (542 Y ) if an 8-holestud or 480 lb ft (650 Y) if a 10-hole stud, usingthe following diagrams.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or the threads ofthe wheel nuts. If you do, the wheel nuts mightcome loose and the wheel could fall off, causing acrash.

8-Hole

10-Hole (Front) 10-Hole (Rear)

5-82

{CAUTION:

If wheel studs are damaged, they can break. If allthe studs on a wheel broke, the wheel could comeoff and cause a crash. If any stud is damagedbecause of a loose-running wheel, it could be thatall of the studs are damaged. To be sure, replaceall studs on the wheel. If the stud holes in a wheelhave become larger, the wheel could collapse inoperation. Replace any wheel if its stud holeshave become larger or distorted in any way.Inspect hubs and hub-piloted wheels for damage.Because of loose running wheels, piloting paddamage may occur and require replacement of theentire hub, for proper centering of the wheels.When replacing studs, hubs, wheel nuts orwheels, be sure to use GM original equipmentparts.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after a time. The wheel couldcome off and cause a crash. When youchange a wheel, remove any rust or dirt fromplaces where the wheel attaches to thevehicle. In an emergency, you can use acloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brush later, if youneed to, to get all the rust or dirt off.

How Often to CheckWheel tightness is so important you should have atechnician check nut tightness on all wheels witha torque wrench after your first 100 miles (160 km), andthen 1,000 miles (1 600 km) after that. Be sure torepeat this service whenever you have a tire removedor serviced. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-5for further information.

5-83

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rustedor corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, replacethe wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts. If the wheelleaks air, replace it.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the same load-carryingcapacity, diameter, width, offset and be mountedthe same way as the one it replaces.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. Itcould affect the braking and handling of yourvehicle, make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collision in whichyou or others could be injured. Always use thecorrect wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts forreplacement.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel boltsor wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM originalequipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have theright wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

A leaking wheel could fail without warning. Awheel designed for tubeless tires could be leakingbecause it is damaged. Do not use an inner tubeor some other thing to try to stop the leaking. Geta new wheel of the proper type.

{CAUTION:

Without the correct wheel, wheel bolts or wheelnuts, you may not be able to stop properly, andyou could have other problems like a tire air-out.You could have a collision. If you do not go toyour dealer to get a new wheel, wheel bolts orwheel nuts, be sure you get the correct ones.Each new wheel should match the original wheelin load-carrying capacity, inflation pressurecapacity, diameter, width, offset and mountingconfiguration.

5-84

Using wheels and tires with higher load-carrying limitsthan the original wheels and tires does not changethe Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) or the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of your vehicle.See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-20 for moreinformation.

Notice: The wrong wheel can cause trouble inbearing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odometercalibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicleground clearance, stopping distance and tireclearance to the body and chassis. You could alsohave other problems like a tire air-out.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.You cannot know how it has been used or how farit has been driven. It could fail suddenly andcause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel, usea new GM original equipment wheel.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,especially if you maintain your tires properly. If airgoes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak outslowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here area few tips about what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag thatpulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake toa stop well out of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like askid and may require the same correction you woulduse in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot fromthe accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under controlby steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It maybe very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gentlybrake to a stop –– well off the road if possible.

5-85

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damageby driving slowly to a level place and turn on yourhazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flasherson page 3-6.

{CAUTION:

Your vehicle, when new, did not include tirechanging equipment or a place to store a tire inthe vehicle. Special tools and procedures arerequired if a tire needs to be serviced. If thesetools and procedures are not used, you or otherscould be injured or killed while trying to change orservice a truck tire.

Your truck, when new, did not include tire changingequipment or a place to store a tire in the vehicle. Fewdrivers of these vehicles have the necessary equipmentaboard to be able to change a flat tire safely. Forexample, you would need a truck jack that can lift severalthousand pounds and a torque wrench that can generateseveral hundred foot-pounds (Y) of twisting force.

{CAUTION:

If you try to put air back into a tire that has runflat, even a tire that was extremely low on air, thetire can have a sudden air-out. This could causeyou to lose control of the vehicle and have aserious crash. Do not refill a flat or very low tirewith air without first having the tire taken off thewheel and checked for damage.

So if you are stopped somewhere by a flat or damagedtire or wheel, you should get expert help. SeeRoadside Assistance Program on page 7-5.

5-86

Appearance Care

Interior CleaningThe vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it iscleaned often. Although not always visible, dust anddirt can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damagecarpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regularvacuuming is recommended to remove particles from theupholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery frombecoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should beremoved as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interiormay experience extremes of heat that could causestains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers and garmentsthat transfer color to home furnishings may alsotransfer color to the vehicle’s interior.

When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleanersspecifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on

surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glasscleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-sprayfrom other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaningglass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratchthe glass and/or cause damage to the rear windowdefogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Beforeusing cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’sdoors and windows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobsusing a small brush with soft bristles.

Products that remove odors from the vehicle’supholstery and clean the vehicle’s glass can be obtainedfrom your dealer/retailer.

5-87

Do not clean the vehicle using:

• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’sinterior surfaces.

• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with acleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damagethe interior and does not improve the effectivenessof soil removal.

• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers can leave residue that streaks andattracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 dropsper gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.

• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.

• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. thatcan damage the vehicle’s interior.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachmentfrequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canistervacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be usedon floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil,always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda.Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil aspossible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a papertowel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper toweluntil no more can be removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible andthen vacuum.

To clean:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water orclub soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rubtoward the center. Continue cleaning, using a cleanarea of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mildsoap solution and repeat the cleaning processthat was used with plain water.

5-88

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaneror spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercialupholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, testa small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locallycleaned area gives any impression that a ringformation may result, clean the entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, a papertowel can be used to blot excess moisture from thefabric or carpet.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solutioncan be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never usespot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Manycommercial cleaners and coatings that are sold topreserve and protect soft plastic surfaces maypermanently change the appearance and feel of theinterior and are not recommended. Do not use siliconeor wax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean the vehicle’s interior because they canalter the appearance by increasing the gloss in anon-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss on theinstrument panel. The increase in gloss may causeannoying reflections in the windshield and even make itdifficult to see through the windshield under certainconditions.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severelyweaken them. In a crash, they might not be ableto provide adequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply siliconegrease with a clean cloth. During very cold, dampweather frequent application may be required. See PartC: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-31.

5-89

Washing Your VehicleThe best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keepit clean by washing it often.

Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that candamage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.Check the cleaning product label. If it states thatit should not be used on plastic parts, do not use iton the vehicle or damage may occur and it wouldnot be covered by the warranty.

Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a carwashing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that arepetroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, asthey can damage the paint, metal or plastic on thevehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtainedfrom your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’directions regarding correct product usage, necessarysafety precautions and appropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after toremove all cleaning agents completely. If they areallowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cottontowel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water to enterthe vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closerthan 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a carwashing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle onpage 5-90.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle byhand may be necessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. Approved cleaning products can beobtained from your dealer/retailer.

If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, theclearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the coloredbasecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoatpaint finish.

5-90

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish maydamage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes andpolishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoatpaint finish on the vehicle.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and othersalts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, birddroppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on paintedsurfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. Ifnecessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are markedsafe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weatherand chemical fallout that can take their toll over a periodof years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keepthe vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal PartsBright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keeptheir luster. Washing with water is all that is usuallyneeded. However, chrome polish may be used onchrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damagingprotective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam orcaustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbedto high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts.

Windshield and Wiper BladesClean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or papertowel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly whencleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildupof vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiperstreaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn ordamaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:

• Extreme dusty conditions

• Sand and salt

• Heat and sun

• Snow and ice, without proper removal

5-91

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheelsand TrimThe vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mildsoap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsingthoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may thenbe applied.

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum or chrome-platedwheels, you could damage the surface of thewheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners onaluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels is similar to the paintedsurface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes onthem because you could damage the surface. Do notuse chrome polish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheelscould damage the wheels. The repairs would notbe covered by the warranty. Use chrome polish onchrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, butavoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff offimmediately after application.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on the vehicle may damage the paint finishand/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, alwayswipe off any overspray from all painted surfaceson the vehicle.

5-92

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repair shopapplies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide thecorrosion protection while maintaining the vehiclewarranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in thefinish should be repaired right away. Bare metalwill corrode quickly and may develop into major repairexpense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-upmaterials available from your dealer/retailer. Largerareas of finish damage can be corrected in yourdealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal and dustcontrol can collect on the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust can develop on theunderbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even though they have corrosionprotection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mudand debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas ofthe frame should be loosened before being flushed.Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing systemcan do this.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions can create achemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon andattack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage cantake two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, andsmall, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we willrepair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces ofnew vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,whichever occurs first.

5-93

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears ona plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, onthe driver side. It can be seen through the windshieldfrom outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears onthe Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. Thiscode helps identify the vehicle’s engine, specifications,and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-102 foryour vehicle’s engine code.

Service Parts Identification LabelThis label is in a location determined by the bodymanufacturer. It is very helpful if you ever need to orderparts. The label has the following information:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

5-94

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical EquipmentNotice: Do not add anything electrical to thevehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damagethe vehicle and the damage would not be coveredby the vehicle’s warranty. Some add-on electricalequipment can keep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even ifthe vehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting toadd anything electrical to the vehicle, see ServicingYour Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-58.

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker inthe light switch. An electrical overload will cause the lightsto go on and off, or in some cases to remain off. If thishappens, have your headlamp wiring checked right away.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuitbreaker inside the motor and a circuit breaker or fuse inthe fuse block. If the motor overheats, the wipers willstop until the motor cools. If the overload is caused byan electrical problem, be sure to get it fixed.

Fusible LinksA fusible link is a short piece of wire several gaugesizes smaller than the circuit it protects. It will melt in anoverload situation, opening the circuit.

The starter and other circuits have fusible links. The sizeis printed on the insulation. If the insulation is burnedbeyond recognition, consult your dealer/retailer for theproper size. Replace a fusible link with one of the samesize and insulation type. Fusible link insulation is aspecial purpose high-temperature material.

Some examples of circuits with fusible links are thehydraulic brake booster motor feed circuit, the generatoroutput circuit, and the intake heater feed circuit invehicles with a diesel engine.

5-95

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsCircuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the powerwindows and other power accessories. When the currentload is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens. Thisprotects the circuit until the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected fromshort circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers,maxi-fuses and fusible links. This greatly reduces thechance of a fire caused by an electrical problem. Theremay be a fuse taped to the wiring harness near thehydraulic brake booster.

Instrument Panel Fuse BlockThere are two instrument panel fuse blocks locatedbehind the instrument panel on the passenger side ofthe vehicle.

Be sure to replace fuses with fuses of the same rating.Do not use fuses of higher amperage than thoseindicated on the fuse block.

5-96

Fuse Usage1 Stoplamps2 Not Used3 Parking Lamps4 Powertrain Control Module5 Auxiliary Wiring6 Heater/Air Conditioning7 Hazard Warning Flashers8 Power Post

Fuse Usage9 Courtesy Lamps

10 Warning Lights, Gages andIndicators

11 Starter12 Rear Axle/Four-Wheel-Drive

13 Trailer Turn Signals/Hazard WarningFlashers

14 Radio/Chime15 Daytime Running Lamps

5-97

Fuse Usage16 Airbag System17 Exterior/Interior Lamps18 Parking Brake19 Accessory Power20 Ignition 421 Sidemarker Lamps22 Turn Signal/Backup Lamps23 Transmission24 Hydraulics/Air BrakeA SpareB Spare

Fuse UsageBlank Not UsedBRK Brake Warning Lamp

RT PRK Passenger Side Parking LampsBlank Not UsedBlank Not Used

LT PARK Driver Side Parking LampsRT REARTRN/STOP

Passenger Side Rear TurnSignal/Stoplamp

LT REARTRN/STOP

Driver Side Rear TurnSignal/Stoplamp

Fuse UsageRADIO RadioBlank Not UsedBlank Not Used

PWR WNDW Power Windows

Relay Usage

ECU/PTO* Engine Control Unit/Power Take-Off*Diesel 7.8 Duramax

BRK LAMP C4/C5 Brake Lamps,C6/C7/C8 Tractor/Trailer Wiring

DRL Daytime Running LampsIGN-4 Ignition

CHMSL Center High Mounted StoplampMRK LTS Sidemarker and Clearance LampsHTD/MIRR Heated Mirrors

HTR Diesel Heated FuelRT TRN TRLR Passenger Side Trailer Turn Signal

Blank Not UsedLT TRN TRLR Driver Side Trailer Turn Signal

Blank Not UsedBlank Not UsedBlank Not Used

5-98

Underhood Fuse BlockWhen a circuit goes out, the problem could be in eitherthe primary or secondary underhood fuse blocks.These blocks use blade-type fuses.

Both underhood fuse blocks are located in the enginecompartment, on the passenger side of the vehicle.

To access the fuse blocks, gently squeeze both sides ofthe cover to unlatch the tabs at the top. Then, unsnapboth attachments at the bottom and remove the cover.

Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical componentson the vehicle may damage it. Always keep thecovers on any electrical component.

Be sure to replace fuses with fuses of the same rating.Do not use fuses of higher amperage than thoseindicated on the fuse block.

Fuse UsageRR DEFOG Rear Defogger

ENG 1 Engine 1ENG 3 Engine 3 (L18/LF6/LF8)

Primary Underhood Fuse Block

5-99

Fuse UsagePCM-B Powertrain Control ModuleTCM Transmissions (LF8)

ENG 4 Engine 4 (LMM/LF6/LF8)ENG 2 Engine 2 (L18/LMM)

HTD FUEL Heated Fuel (LMM)BLANK Not UsedBLANK Not UsedNOTE 3 Fan Relay (LMM), Emissions (L18)

A/C COMP Air Conditioning CompressorABS 1 Antilock Brake System 1ABS 2 Antilock Brake System 2ABS 3 Antilock Brake System 3

ENGINE EngineE/A PUMP Electronic/Automatic Pump

HORN Horn

NOTE 2 Fuel (L18/LMM), Electronic ControlModule (LF6)

Fuse UsageNOTE 4 Electronic Control Module (LF6)STUD A SpareSTUD B Spare

Relay UsageNOTE 1 LMM/L18 Fuel Pump Relay

IGN B RELAY Ignition RelaySTARTER

RELAY Starter Relay

HORN RELAY Horn RelayIGN A RELAY Ignition Relay

PTO/ECU*RELAY

Power Take-Off/Engine Control Unit(*Diesel 7.8L LF8)

REVERSERELAY Reverse Relay

FAN RELAY Fan Relay (LMM)

5-100

Fuse UsageIGN 1 Ignition 1IGN 4 Ignition 4IGN 3 Ignition 3

BATT/HAZ Battery/Hazard Warning FlashersHEADLAMP HeadlampsLIGHTING Interior/Exterior Lamps

HVAC Climate Control System

NOTE C4/C5 Electric Brake,C6/C7/C8 Brake Lamps

Secondary UnderhoodFuse Block

5-101

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Part C: Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 6-31 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label locatedunder the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more

information.

Cooling System – C4/C5 Models

6.6L V8 Automatic Transmission 27.9 qt 26.4 L

8.1L V8 Automatic Transmission 29.8 qt 28.2 L

8.1L V8 Manual Transmission 30.1 qt 28.5 L

Cooling System – C6/C7/C8 Automatic Transmission

7.2L L6 Engine 32.0 qt 30.2 L

Isuzu 6H Engine (207 - 275 hp) 34.8 qt 32.9 L

Isuzu 6H Engine (300 hp) 33.9 qt 32.1 L

8.1L V8 Engine 32.5 qt 30.8 L

5-102


English Metric

Cooling System – C6/C7/C8 Manual Transmission

7.2L L6 Engine 30.4 qt 28.8 L

7.2L L6 Engine with A/C and Increased Cooling 33.9 qt 32.1 L

Isuzu 6H Engine (207–275 hp) 32.7 qt 31.0 L

Isuzu 6H Engine (207–275 hp) with A/C and IncreasedCooling 35.9 qt 34.0 L

Isuzu 6H Engine (300 hp) 36.0 qt 34.1 L

Isuzu 6H Engine (300 hp) with A/C and Increased Cooling 36.0 qt 34.1 L

8.1L V8 Engine 33.3 qt 31.5 L

8.1L V8 Engine with A/C and Increased Cooling 34.9 qt 33.0 L

Engine Oil with Filter

6.6L V8 Engine 14.6 qt 13.8 L

7.2L L6 Caterpillar® C7 Engine 30.0 qt 28.4 L

Isuzu 6H1 Engine 23.8 qt 22.5 L

8.1L V8 Engine 10.0 qt 9.4 L

Check fill level on the oil indicator after initial fill to make sure it is actually full. Oil level may vary depending onvehicle option content.1Additional oil is required with auxiliary oil filter systems. Make sure to add enough extra oil to fill the auxiliary oilfilter system. For vehicles equipped with the LUBERFINER 750-C, add 14 quarts (13.25 L).

5-103


English Metric

Fuel Capacity – C4/C5 Models

Standard (Mid-Mounted) 25 gal 94.6 L

Optional1 (Dual-Tank) (Mid-Mounted) 40 gal 151.4 L

Optional (Mid-Mounted) 32 gal 121.1 L

Optional (Side-Mounted) 35 gal 132.5 L



Optional (Mid-Mounted) 80 gal 302.8 L1One 25-gallon (94.6 L) tank and one 15-gallon (56.8 L) tank

Fuel Capacity – C6/C7/C8 Models

Optional 35 gal 132.4 L

Standard 50 gal 189.2 L

Optional 50 gal 189.2 L

Optional1 (Dual Tanks) 70 gal 264.8 L

Optional2 (Dual Tanks) 75 gal 283.8 L

Optional3 (Dual Tanks) 100 gal 378.5 L1Two 35-gallon (132.4 L) tanks2One 25-gallon (94.6 L) tank and one 50-gallon (189.2 L) tank3Two 50-gallon (189.2 L) tanks

5-104


English Metric

Front 4WD Axle (G38) 7.0 pt 3.6 L

Rear Axle – Single Speed

80 (GL4) 10.0 pt 4.7 L

19060D (HPM), 19060S (HPK), 21060D (HPN),21060S (HPP), 22060S (HPG) 31.0 pt 14.7 L

23090S (HPT) 42.5 pt 20.1 L

23105D (HNB), 23105S (HNA) 51.0 pt 24.1 L

26105S (HPA) 51.0 pt 24.1 L

S110 (HD2) and S130 (HD1) 15.0 pt 7.1 L

Rear Axle – Tandem

DS344 (front) (HPI) 34.0 pt 16.1 L

DS344 (rear) (HPI) 31.0 pt 14.7 L

DS404 (HPE), DS404P (HPJ) (front/rear unit) 32.0 pt 15.1 L

RSH44 (front/ rear unit) (HP3) 29.0 pt 13.7 L

5-105


English Metric

Rear Axle – Two-Speed

19060T (HPL), 22060T (HPH) 38.0 pt 18.0 L

21060T (H15) 38.0 pt 18.0 L

23082T (H25) 44.0 pt 20.8 L

26080T (GJ4) 44.0 pt 20.8 L

Transfer Case (Four-Wheel Drive) 4.0 pt 1.9 L

Transmission Fluid, Automatic

3000 RDS and EVS, and 3500 RDS and EVS with PTOProvision 59.0 pt 28.1 L

3000 RDS and EVS, and 3500 RDS and EVS without PTOProvision 52.0 pt 24.6 L

1000 HS, RDS, MH, PTS and EVS, 2200 HS, RDS, MH,PTS and EVS, 2500 HS and RDS, and 2300 HS and RDS 35.0 pt 16.5 L

Add 2 pints (1 L) when changing spin-on or remote filter.See the Allison® Automatic Transmission Operator’s Manual for fluid check and maintenance information.

5-106


English Metric

Transmission Fluid, Manual

ES052-7, ES066-7 22.0 pt 10.4 L

FS5205A 12.5 pt 5.9 L

FSO8406, FS6305A, FS6305B, FS6406, FS5406A 19.5 pt 9.2 L

FS4205A, FS4205B 11.5 pt 5.4 L

RT6609 12.0 pt 5.7 L

RT8709 26.0 pt 12.3 L

RT8908LL 28.0 pt 13.2 L

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck the fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsEngine RPO Type

6.6L V8 DURAMAX® LMM Common Rail Fuel System

7.2L L6 Caterpillar® C7 LF6 Hydraulic/Electronic Unit InjectorFuel System

7.8L L6 Isuzu 6H LF8 Common Rail Fuel System

8.1L V8 VORTEC™ L18 Single Port Fuel Injector FuelSystem

5-107

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsMaintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part NumberAir Compressor FilterHaldex compressor (8.1L Engine Only) 88915425 A507CF

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter6.6L V8 (C4/C5 Models) 19152817 A3102C7.2L L6; Isuzu 6H (C6/C7/C8 Models) with Standard AirCleaner 88937525 A2031C

7.2L L6; Isuzu 6H (C6/C7/C8 Models) with Heavy Duty AirCleaner 889375251 A2031C

8.1L V8 (C4/C5 Models) 88937527 A2032C8.1L V8 (C6/C7/C8 Models) with Heavy Duty Air Cleaner 88937525 A2031C8.1L V8 (C6/C7/C8 Models) with Standard Air Cleaner 88937545 A2034C

Engine Oil Filter6.6L V8 88917036 PF22327.2L L6 — 1R-18072

Isuzu 6H 94392475 —8.1L V8 25324052 PF454

5-108

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part NumberFuel Filter

6.6L V8 98017645 TP1298B7.2L L6 — 1R-07512

Isuzu 6H 98026037 —8.1L V8 (C4/C5 with NG6/NK1 or U-Haul) 15807649 —8.1L V8 (C4/C5 with all other fuel tanks) 10376257 —8.1L V8 (All C6/C7/C8) 10370247 —

Power Steering Fluid Filter 88892858 —Secondary Fuel Filter

6.6L V8 — —7.2L L6 (NWB/KUR) 25982639 S32293

Isuzu 6H (NWB) 15618921 S32023

Isuzu 6H (KUK) 88983117 TP15198.1L V8 (K28 and standard U-Haul) 25014476 TP1247

Spark Plugs6.6L V8 — —7.2L L6 — —Isuzu 6H — —8.1L V8 12578277 41-983

1Optional air filter (GM Part No. 88937548 AC Delco No. A2035C) for C6/C7/C8 Models. Fits inside standard sizefilter (GM Part No. 88937525 AC Delco No. A2031C) listed previously.2Caterpillar® part number.3Racor part number.See the Allison Transmission Operator’s Manual in your vehicle for external filter part numbers and information.

5-109

Engine Drive Belt Routing

A. Air Conditioning Compressor.B. Dual Generators.

A. Air Conditioning Compressor.B. Air Brake Compressor.

8.1L V8 Engine (C4, C5)

8.1L V8 Engine (C6,C7,C8)

5-110

A. Dual Generators. A. Air Conditioning Compressor.

6.6L V8 Duramax Diesel Engine Isuzu 6H Diesel Engine

5-111

A. Air Conditioning Compressor.

7.2L I6 Caterpillar Diesel Engine

5-112

Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2Introduction ...................................................6-2Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2How This Section is Organized .........................6-3Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services ...........6-4Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-4Scheduled Maintenance Supplements ................6-4

Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-5Part B: Owner Checks and Services ................6-26At Each Fuel Fill ..........................................6-26At Least Twice a Year ...................................6-27At Least Once a Year ...................................6-30Part C: Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants ................................................6-31Part D: Maintenance Record ..........................6-33

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

6-1

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper level andchange as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plansupplements the vehicle warranties. See the Warrantyand Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer/retailer fordetails.

Maintenance RequirementsMaintenance intervals, checks, inspections andrecommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in thismanual are necessary to keep this vehicle in goodworking condition. Any damage caused by failure tofollow scheduled maintenance may not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepthe vehicle in good working condition, but also helps theenvironment. Improper vehicle maintenance can evenaffect the quality of the air we breathe. Improperfluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase thelevel of emissions from the vehicle. To help protectthe environment, and to keep the vehicle in goodcondition, be sure to maintain the vehicle properly.

6-2

How This Section is OrganizedThis maintenance schedule is divided into four parts:

“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explainswhat to have done and how often. Some of theseservices can be complex, so unless you are technicallyqualified and have the necessary equipment, letyour dealer/retailer do these jobs.

Your dealer/retailer has trained and supported servicepeople that will perform the work using genuine parts.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can bedangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can beseriously injured. Do your own maintenance workonly if you have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job. If you haveany doubt, have a qualified technician do the work.See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 5-5.

To purchase service information, see ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 7-10.

“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells whatshould be checked and when. It also explains what caneasily be done to keep the vehicle in good condition.

“Part C: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” listssome recommended products necessary to helpkeep the vehicle properly maintained. These products,or their equivalents, should be used whether you do thework yourself or have it done.

“Part D: Maintenance Record” is a place to recordand keep track of the maintenance performed onthe vehicle. Keep the maintenance receipts. They maybe needed to qualify the vehicle for warranty repairs.

6-3

Part A: Scheduled MaintenanceServicesIn this part are scheduled maintenance services whichare to be performed at the mileage intervals specified.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe want to help keep this vehicle in good workingcondition. But we do not know exactly how you will driveit. You might drive very short distances only a fewtimes a week. Or you might drive long distances all thetime in very hot, dusty weather. You might use thevehicle in making deliveries or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might needmore frequent checks and replacements. So please readthe following and note how you drive. If you have anyquestions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition,see your dealer/retailer.

This part tells you the maintenance services that shouldbe done and when to schedule them.

When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trainedand supported service people will perform the workusing genuine parts.

The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed inPart C. Make sure whoever services the vehicle usesthese. All parts should be replaced and all necessaryrepairs done before you or anyone else drives thevehicle.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo within recommendedlimits on the vehicle’s Certification or TireInformation label. See Loading the Vehicle onpage 4-20.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legaldriving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octaneon page 5-6 for gasoline engine vehicles or WhatFuel to Use on page 5-8 for diesel engine vehicles.

Scheduled MaintenanceSupplementsIf the vehicle has a Caterpillar® diesel engine, the ownermanual is supplemented by the Caterpillar® DieselEngine Operation & Maintenance Manual. If the vehiclehas an Allison Transmission®, the owner manual issupplemented by an Allison Transmission® Operator’sManual. Always refer to these manuals for relatedmaintenance services.

6-4

Scheduled MaintenanceThe services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life ofthis vehicle. The services shown after 100,000 miles(166 000 km) should be repeated at the same miles (km)after those intervals for the life of this vehicle.

Gasoline engine vehicles and some DURAMAX® dieseland Isuzu diesel engine vehicles have a computerthat lets you know when to change the engine oil. Thisis not based on mileage, but on engine operationand engine temperature. When the computer hascalculated that the oil needs changing, the Engine OilLife System will indicate that a change is necessary. SeeEngine Oil Life System (Gasoline Engine) on page 5-35or Engine Oil Life System (DURAMAX/Isuzu DieselEngines) on page 5-36 or Engine Oil Life System(Caterpillar Diesel Engine) on page 5-38.

The “Footnotes” at the end of this MaintenanceSchedule further explain maintenance services.

See Service Publications Ordering Information onpage 7-10.

100 Miles (160 km)❑ Wheel stud nut service. (36)

1,000 Miles (1 600 km)❑ Wheel stud nut service. (36)❑ Rear axle air shift motor service. (10)

7,500 Miles (12 000 km)❑ Gasoline Engine Only: Check engine oil life system.

If engine oil and filter are changed, reset system. See“Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)” in the Index. (2) (8)

❑ Check fluid levels (or every 3 months, whicheveroccurs first). (1) (5)

❑ Chassis lubrication service (or every 6 months,whichever occurs first). (11)

❑ Spring-to-axle U-bolts and shackle bolts service. (15)❑ Wheels and tires service. (14)❑ Hydraulic brake service (or every 6 months, whichever

occurs first). (6) (36)❑ Parking brake service (or every 6 months, whichever

occurs first). (21)❑ Air brake service (or every 6 months, whichever

occurs first). (32)❑ Air brake automatic slack adjuster service (or every

500 hours, whichever occurs first). (33)

6-5

❑ Check air brake relay valve operation and check forleaks (or every month, or every 300 hours, whicheveroccurs first).

❑ Clean air brake application valve (or every 3 months,or every 300 hours, whichever occurs first). Lubricatelinkage.

❑ Air brake chamber service (or every 2 months,whichever occurs first). (34)



❑ DURAMAX/Isuzu Diesel Without Engine Oil LifeSystem Only: Change engine oil and filter (or every12 months, or every 750 hours of engine operation,whichever occurs first). (2) (39)

❑ DURAMAX/Isuzu Diesel With Engine Oil Life SystemOnly: Check oil life system. If engine oil and filter arechanged, reset system. See “Engine Oil (DURAMAX/Isuzu Diesel)” in the Index. (2) (9)



❑ Gasoline Engine: Inspect engine air cleaner filter.If necessary, replace the filter. If vehicle is driven industy/dirty conditions, inspect filter at every engine oilchange. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-38for more information.

❑ Diesel Engine: Inspect engine air cleaner filter changeindicator. If necessary, replace the filter. If vehicle isdriven in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect filter changeindicator at every engine oil change. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 5-38 for more information.

❑ Diesel Only: Replace fuel filter (or every 750 hours ofengine operation, whichever occurs first).

❑ Steering system service. (12)❑ Front and rear suspension service. (13)❑ Spring-to-axle U-bolts and shackle bolts service. (15)❑ Exhaust system service (or every 6 months, whichever

occurs first). (2) (3) (16)❑ Wheels and tires service. (14)❑ Hydraulic brake service (or every 6 months, whichever


occurs first). (21)

6-6

❑ Air brake service (or every 6 months, whicheveroccurs first). (32)

❑ Air brake automatic slack adjuster service (or every500 hours, whichever occurs first). (33)




❑ Air compressor dry element pleated paper air strainerservice (or every 2 months, or every 800 hours,whichever occurs first).

❑ Thermostatically controlled engine cooling fanservice. (3) (19)

❑ Shields and underhood insulation service. (3) (4) (20)❑ Gasoline Engine: Air compressor remote mounted air

filter dry element pleated paper air strainer service (orevery 6 months or every 1800 hours, whicheveroccurs first).

22,500 Miles (36 000 km)❑ Gasoline Engine Only: Check engine oil life system. If

engine oil and filter are changed, reset system. See“Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)” in the Index. (2) (8)



❑ Inspect door hinge pins and bushings and replace asnecessary.

❑ Cooling system service. Clean the cooling system filtercap with clean water, clean the core, pressure test thecap and the system for proper pressure capability, andinspect condition of cooling and heater hoses andclamps. Replace hoses if cracked, swollen, ordamaged.

❑ Wheels and tires service. (14)❑ Hydraulic brake service (or every 6 months, whichever


occurs first). (21)

6-7






❑ Air brake system valve service (or every 3 months, orevery 900 hours, whichever occurs first). (37)

❑ Air intake system service (or every 24 months,whichever occurs first). (3) (4) (23)

❑ Evaporative Control System service, if equipped, (orevery 24 months, whichever occurs first). (2) (24) †

❑ Rear axle air shift motor service. (10)

24,000 Miles (40 000 km)❑ Lubricate U-joints (or every 6 months, whichever

occurs first).







6-8




❑ Gasoline Engine Only: Replace fuel filter(s) (or every12 months, whichever occurs first). (2)

❑ Check restraint system. (40)❑ Steering system service. (12)❑ Front and rear suspension service. (13)❑ Spring-to-axle U-bolts and shackle bolts service. (15)❑ Exhaust system service (or every 6 months, whichever

occurs first). (2) (3) (16)❑ Wheel bearing (grease type) service (and whenever

hubs are removed). (22) (36)❑ Wheels and tires service. (14)❑ Hydraulic brake service (or every 6 months, whichever


occurs first). (21)







❑ C600, C700, and C800 Gasoline Engines Only:Engine drive belts service (or every 12 months,whichever occurs first.) (17)




6-9

37,500 Miles (60 000 km)❑ Gasoline Engine Only: Check engine oil life system. If

engine oil and filter are changed, reset system. See“Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)” in the Index. (2) (8)







500 hours, whichever occurs first). (33)❑ Check air brake relay valve operation and check for

leaks (or every month, or every 300 hours, whicheveroccurs first).








❑ Gasoline Engine: Replace engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-38 for moreinformation.




6-10

❑ Cooling system service. Clean the cooling system fillercap with clean water, clean the core, pressure test thecap and the system for proper pressure capability, andinspect condition of cooling and heater hoses andclamps. Replace hoses if cracked, swollen, ordamaged.














❑ Shields and underhood insulation service. (3) (4) (20)❑ Rear axle air shift motor service. (10)❑ Air intake system service (or every 24 months,

whichever occurs first). (3) (4) (23)❑ Evaporative Control System service, if equipped, (or

every 24 months, whichever occurs first). (2) (24) †❑ Gasoline Engine: Air compressor remote mounted air


6-11


occurs first).

50,000 Miles (80 000 km)❑ Inspect air compressor discharge port (or every

6 months or every 1,800 hours, whichever occursfirst.)





❑ Wheels and tires service. (14)❑ DURAMAX® Diesel Engine Only: Adjust valve lash (or

every 2,625 hours of engine operation, whicheveroccurs first). (18)

❑ Hydraulic brake service (or every 6 months, whicheveroccurs first). (6) (36)

❑ Parking brake service (or every 6 months, whicheveroccurs first). (21)










❑ Gasoline Engine Only (Vehicles with GVW greaterthan 16,000 lbs): Spark plug service. (2) (25)


6-12








occurs first). (2) (3) (16)❑ Wheel bearing (grease type) service (and whenever

hubs are removed). (22) (36)

❑ Wheels and tires service. (14)❑ Isuzu Diesel Engine Only: Adjust valve lash (or every

2,625 hours of engine operation, whichever occursfirst). (18)









❑ C600, C700, and C800 Gasoline Engines Only:Engine drive belts service (or every 12 months,whichever occurs first). (17)

6-13









❑ Wheels and tires service. (14)









❑ Rear axle air shift motor service. (10)❑ Air intake system service (or every 24 months,

whichever occurs first). (3) (4) (23)❑ Evaporative Control System service, if equipped, (or

every 24 months, whichever occurs first). (2) (24) †

6-14


occurs first).

















6-15




❑ Fuel tank, fuel cap and fuel lines service (or every72 months, whichever occurs first). (2) (26) †

❑ Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system inspection(if equipped) (or every 72 months, whichever occursfirst). (2) (27)
















6-16






❑ Gasoline Engine: Replace engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-38 for moreinformation.







occurs first). (2) (3) (16)❑ Inspect door hinge pins and bushings and replace as

necessary.❑ Wheel bearing (grease type) service (and whenever

hubs are removed). (22) (36)❑ Wheels and tires service. (14)❑ Hydraulic brake service (or every 6 months, whichever



occurs first). (32)

6-17







❑ C600, C700, and C800 Gasoline Engines Only:Engine drive belts service (or every 12 months,whichever occurs first). (17)


❑ Shields and underhood insulation service. (3) (4) (20)❑ Rear axle air shift motor service. (10)❑ Air intake system service (or every 24 months,

whichever occurs first). (3) (4) (23)

❑ Evaporative Control System service, if equipped, (orevery 24 months, whichever occurs first). (2) (24) †

❑ Gasoline Engine: Air compressor remote mounted airfilter dry element pleated paper air strainer service (orevery 6 months or every 1800 hours, whicheveroccurs first).


occurs first).








occurs first). (32)

6-18





100,000 Miles (160 000 km)❑ Diesel Only: Inspect engine drive belt; replace as

necessary.❑ Gasoline Engine Only (Vehicles with GVW of

16,000 lbs or less): Spark plug service. (2) (25)❑ Change power steering fluid (or every 36 months,

whichever occurs first). (12)❑ Replace power steering reservoir filter element

(or every 24 months, whichever occurs first).❑ Wheel bearing (oil type) service (and whenever hubs

are removed). (22) (36)❑ Except four-wheel drive: Front axle service. (31)❑ Four-wheel drive only: Front axle service. (30)

❑ Four-wheel drive only: Transfer case service. (30)❑ Rear axle service — Eaton®, Rockwell®, Spicer® axles

(or every 12 months, whichever occurs first). (30)❑ Exhaust brake service, if equipped. Check for

excessive spindle free play and smooth operation.Lubricate ball joint cap.

❑ Inspect air compressor discharge port (or every6 months or every 1,800 hours, whichever occursfirst).

❑ Manual transmission (ZF 6-speed only) fluidreplacement (or every 48 months, whichever occursfirst).

❑ Trailer brake hand control valve service (or every12 months, or every 3,600 hours, whichever occursfirst). (35)

120,000 Miles (192 000 km)❑ C600, C700, and C800 Gasoline Engines Only:

Replace engine drive belts.❑ C400 and C500 Gasoline Engines Only: Engine drive

belts service (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst). (17)

❑ DURAMAX Diesel Only: Diesel ParticulateFilter (DPF) service. Then every 100,000 miles(160 000 km). (7) (38)

6-19

150,000 Miles (240 000 km)❑ Cooling system service (or every 60 months since

last service, whichever occurs first). (2) (29)❑ Diesel Engine Only: Inspect engine drive belt;

replace as necessary.❑ Isuzu Diesel Only: Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)

service (or every 4,500 hours, whichever occursfirst). Then every 150,000 miles (240 000 km),or every 4,500 hours, whichever occurs first. (7)

200,000 Miles (320 000 km)❑ Rear axle service — Eaton®, Rockwell®, Spicer®

axles (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst). (30)

❑ Remove, disassemble, clean, and inspect the airbrake trailer supply valve (or every 2 years, orevery 7,200 hours, whichever occurs first).

❑ Diesel Engine Only: Inspect engine drive belt;replace as necessary.

250,000 Miles (400 000 km)❑ Four-wheel drive only: Front axle service. (30)❑ Four-wheel drive only: Transfer case service. (30)❑ Manual transmission (except ZF 6-speed) fluid

replacement (or every 60 months, whichever occursfirst).

300,000 Miles (480 000 km)❑ Rear axle service — Eaton®, Rockwell®, Spicer®

axles (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst). (30)

❑ Remove, disassemble, clean, and inspect the airbrake air dryer (or every 3 years, or 10,800 hours,whichever occurs first). Replace desiccant.

❑ Isuzu Diesel Only: Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)service (or every 4,500 hours, whichever occursfirst). Then every 150,000 miles (240 000 km),or every 4,500 hours, whichever occurs first. (7)

Footnotes† = The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or theCalifornia Air Resources Board has determined that thefailure to perform this maintenance item will not nullifythe emission warranty or limit recall liability prior tothe completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,urge that all recommended maintenance services beperformed at the indicated intervals and themaintenance be recorded.

(1) = If your vehicle has an Allison Transmission®,your owner manual is supplemented by an AllisonTransmission® Operator’s Manual. Always refer tothese manuals for related maintenance services.

(2) = An Emission Control Service.

(3) = A Noise Emission Control Device.

6-20

(4) = Applies to vehicles sold in the United States and isrecommended for vehicles sold in Canada.

(5) = Check fluidlevel in brake master cylinder, powersteering pump, front and rear axles, transmission, andhydraulic spring parking brake pump (if equipped). A lowfluid level in the brake master cylinder can indicate wornbrake linings and should be checked accordingly.

(6) = Inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook-up,binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect discbrake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition.Inspect caliper assemblies. Check brake pedal forexcessive free play or travel (or every 6 months,whichever occurs first) and have serviced if needed.Check brakes more often if driving habits and conditionsresult in frequent braking.

(7) = Check for filter ash, sensor adjustment, andsensor hose restriction. Clean as needed. This servicecan be complex; you should have your dealer/retailerperform this service.

(8) = This vehicle has the Engine Oil Life System. Thissystem will show you when to change the engine oiland filter — usually between 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and7,500 miles (12 000 km) since your last oil change.Under severe conditions, the indicator may comeon before 3,000 miles (5 000 km). Never drive yourgasoline engine vehicle more than 7,500 miles(12 000 km) or 12 months without an oil and filterchange.

Remember to reset the Engine Oil Life Systemwhenever the oil is changed. For more information, seeEngine Oil Life System (Gasoline Engine) on page 5-35or Engine Oil Life System (DURAMAX/Isuzu DieselEngines) on page 5-36 or Engine Oil Life System(Caterpillar Diesel Engine) on page 5-38.

(9) = This vehicle has the Engine Oil Life System. Thissystem will show you when to change the engine oiland filter — usually between 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and15,000 miles (24 000 km) since your last oil change.Under severe conditions, the indicator may comeon before 3,000 miles (5 000 km). Never drive yourdiesel engine vehicle more than 15,000 miles(24 000 km), or 12 months, or 750 engine hours,without an oil and filter change.

Remember to reset the Engine Oil Life Systemwhenever the oil is changed. For more information, seeEngine Oil Life System (Gasoline Engine) on page 5-35or Engine Oil Life System (DURAMAX/Isuzu DieselEngines) on page 5-36 or Engine Oil Life System(Caterpillar Diesel Engine) on page 5-38.

(10) = Inspect rear axle air shift motor for fluid leaks.Remove plug to check fluid level. Inspect air linesand hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, etc.Inspect at 1,000 miles (1 600 km) and 22,500 miles(36 000 km) and then every 22,500 miles (36 000 km)thereafter.

6-21

(11) = Chassis Lubrication Service: Lubricate all greasefittings in front suspension, front axle, and steeringlinkage. Do not lubricate kingpin bushings with airpressure equipment; instead, use a hand grease gun toensure complete purge and eliminate sealer capdistortion. Front axle tie rod ends, both upper and lowerkingpin fittings, and both steering linkage relay rod endsshould be greased with the vehicle loaded on the groundand wheels turned straight ahead, not with the vehicle ona hoist. Apply kingpin bushing lubricant to both upper andlower kingpin grease fittings until new lubricant purgesfrom between the upper shim pack and thrust bearing.Lubricate transmission and shift linkage, hood latchesand hood hinges, parking brake lever pivot, clevis pinsand linkage, disc brake caliper rails, clutch linkage andrelease bearing (if equipped), bearing pads, propshaftuniversal joints, brake camshaft bracket, slack adjusters,pedal shaft, clutch cross shaft, clutch pedal springs, andclutch cable bushing at transmission. Lubricatesuspension, axle, and steering linkage more often whenoperating under dusty or muddy conditions and inexcessive off-road use. Frequently power-washedvehicles will require more frequent lubrication.

(12) = Check steering system:

• Look for damaged, loose, or missing parts. Inspectthe steering linkage relay rod and tie rod ends forlooseness or lack of lubricant. Also look forparts showing signs of wear or lack of lubrication.Replace parts as needed. Also check steering gearmounting bolts, pitman arm nut, gear housingupper cover and side cover attaching bolts, steeringcolumn mounting bolts and cardan joint clampbolts; tighten if necessary. See the service manual.

• Inspect power steering hoses, tubes, and fittings forleaks. Hoses and lines must not be twisted, kinked,or tightly bent. Make sure clips, clamps, supportingtubes, and hoses are in place and properly secured.

• Check steering gear for leakage around pitman shaftand housing. If leakage is evident (lubricant oozingout, not just oily film), leak should be correctedimmediately.

(13) = Check front and rear suspension. Look fordamaged, loose, or missing parts or parts showing signsof wear or lack of lubrication. Replace parts asneeded.

6-22

(14) = Adjust tire pressures as indicated on theCertification or Tire Information label for optimum tirelife. See Tires on page 5-76 for further details.Check tires for excessive or abnormal wear or damage.Also check for damaged wheels. Replace wheelsand/or tires as needed.

(15) = Check spring-to-axle U-bolts and shackle boltsfor proper torque. See the service manual for torquesequence and specifications. When parts are replaced,the torque must be checked and adjusted more oftenduring the first 6,000 miles (10 000 km). Check torque at500 miles (800 km) and 2,000 miles (3 000 km) afterfirst use of parts.

(16) = Check complete exhaust system, including DPFpressure lines, and cab areas near the exhaust systemfor broken, damaged, missing, or out-of-position parts.Also inspect for open seams, holes, loose connections, orother conditions which could let exhaust fumes seep intothe driver compartment. Needed repairs should be madeat once. To help maintain system integrity, replaceexhaust pipes whenever a new muffler is put on.

(17) = Check all gasoline engine drive belts for cracks,fraying, and wear. Replace as needed.

(18) = Adjust valve lash. Incorrect valve clearance willresult in increased engine noise and reduced engineoutput.

(19) = With the engine off and below normal operatingtemperature, check to see that the thermostaticallycontrolled engine cooling fan can be rotated by hand onviscous-operated drives. Replace as needed.

(20) = Check shields and underhood insulation fordamage or looseness. Adjust or replace as needed.

(21) = Inspect parking brake drum and linings for wearor cracks and check linkage and adjustment.

(22) = Wheel bearing service:

• Grease type — Clean, inspect, and lubricate withthe proper wheel bearing grease at designatedintervals or when hubs are removed. See Part C:Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-31.

• Oil-filled type — Some wheel bearings arelubricated by axle lubricant. When you have oil-filledhubs, use lubricant identical to that used in theaxle. Lubricant change intervals are the same forfront and rear axles. However, you must maintainthe proper oil level between change intervals.See Front Wheel Bearings with Oil-Filled Hubs onpage 5-75 and Part C: Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 6-31.

(23) = Check the air intake system installation tosee that gaskets are seated properly and all hoseconnections, fasteners, and other components are tight.Tighten connections and fasteners or replace partsas required.

6-23

(24) = Evaporative Control System Service, if equipped:Check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses for properconnections and correct routing (or every 24 months,whichever occurs first). Replace parts as needed.(25) = Replace spark plugs. Inspect wires for damage.Check the wire boot and boot heat shield fit at sparkplugs and coil. Replace parts as needed.(26) = Check the fuel tank, fuel cap and fuel lines fordamage which could cause leakage. Inspect fuel cap forcorrect sealing ability and any indications of damage.Check fuel cap gasket for even filler neck imprint.Replace parts as needed.(27) = Check Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) systemas described in the service manual. See ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 7-10.

(28) = Inspect Electronic Vacuum Regulator Valve(EVRV) filter for excessive contamination or plugging.If needed, clean filter with solution of soap and water, letdry and install.(29) = Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This servicecan be complex; you should have your dealer/retailerperform this service. See Part C: Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 6-31 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap, andneck. Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap.For Caterpillar® diesel engines, always refer to theCaterpillar® Diesel Engine Operation & MaintenanceManual for coolant recommendations and changeintervals.

(30) = Change the lubricant. See Part C: RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 6-31.

(31) = Front axle service: Re-pack upper kingpin rollerbearing.

(32) = Air brake service:

• Inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook-up,binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect drumbrake linings for wear or cracks. Inspect other brakeparts at each wheel, including drums and wheelspeed sensor wiring. Check brake pedal forexcessive free play or travel (or every 6 months,whichever occurs first) and have serviced if needed.Check brakes more often if driving habits andconditions result in frequent braking. Replace airdryer cartridge only if excessive oil or moisture ispresent. A small amount of oil in the system is normaland should not be considered as a reason to replacethe cartridge.

• Test air lines for leaks; tighten as needed. Replacecompressor filter.

• Inspect air parking brake chamber for leaks anddamage. Inspect lines and hoses for leaks, cracks,chafing, etc. Also check all attachments for tightness,wear, or damage. Note: The spring brake section ofthe rear brake diaphragms are non-serviceable.

6-24

• Replace the air compressor filter element, mountedon the air compressor. For remote air compressorintake service, refer to engine air cleaner filterreplacement.

• Remove, disassemble, clean, and inspect the safetyvalve, service brake chambers, quick release valves,quick release/double check valve combinations,parking brake control valve, double check valves,pressure protection valves, and ether injector(if equipped).

• Remove, disassemble, and clean the applicationvalve; replace parts showing wear.

• Remove, disassemble, clean, and inspect the springbrake control valve; replace rubber parts.

(33) = Clean and lubricate air brake automatic slackadjuster. Check pushrod travel and auto adjustmentoperation. Have serviced if needed.

(34) = Air brake chamber service: Check operation,mounting clamps, and air lines and check for leaks.

(35) = Trailer brake hand control valve service: Checkoperation; lubricate cam and follower.

(36) = Tighten the wheel stud nuts to the specified torquevalues at 100 miles (160 km). Thereafter, tighten them1,000 miles (1 600 km) after each time the wheel isremoved. See Tightening the Wheel Nuts on page 5-80.

(37) = Inspect and clean any accumulated dirt, gravel,or other foreign objects from the valves and valve bootsas needed. Using light oil, lubricate brake pedal tobrake application valve linkage components. Check anyrubber boots for cracks, holes, or deterioration andreplace if necessary.

(38) = Estimated minimum. Actual mileage depends onfuel and oil consumed.

(39) = If the vehicle has the Isuzu diesel engine and isused primarily for long trip, highway service, changethe engine oil and filter every 18,000 miles (28 800 km),or every 12 months, or every 750 hours of engineoperation, whichever occurs first.

(40) = Make sure any safety belt reminder light andsafety belt assemblies are working properly. Lookfor any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts.If you see anything that might keep a safety beltsystem from doing its job, have it repaired. Have anytorn or frayed safety belts replaced.

6-25

Part B: Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should be performedat the intervals specified to help ensure vehiclesafety, dependability, and emission control performance.

For your safety and that of others, any of thesafety-related components that may have beendamaged in an accident should be checked and anyneeded repairs made before operating the vehicle.

At the minimum, these routine checks should be madeevery 6 months or 6,000 miles (10 000 km), whicheveroccurs first. Whenever repairs are needed, havethem completed before operating the vehicle.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checks ateach fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level Check

Notice: It is important to check the engine oilregularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure tokeep the engine oil at the proper level can causedamage to the engine not covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil ifnecessary. See Engine Oil (DURAMAX Diesel Engine)on page 5-24 or Engine Oil (Caterpillar Diesel Engine)on page 5-27 or Engine Oil (Isuzu Diesel Engine) onpage 5-28 or Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on page 5-32.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant(Caterpillar Diesel Engines) on page 5-47.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level in the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid ifnecessary. See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-50.

Tire Inflation CheckCheck tire inflation cold. Make sure the tires are inflatedto the correct pressures. See Loading the Vehicle onpage 4-20 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-77.

6-26

At Least Twice a Year

Wiper Blade CheckInspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, orcontamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, ifcontaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn ordamaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement onpage 5-71 and Windshield and Wiper Blades onpage 5-91 for more information.

Weatherstrip LubricationSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,damp weather more frequent application may berequired. Part C tells you what to use.

Body Lubrication ServiceLubricate all exposed surfaces such as door checks,door lock bolts, lock strike plates, door hinge bushings,latches, and dovetail bumper wedges. Where oilholes are provided, a dripless oil can be used. The seatadjusters, seat track, door weatherstrips, and rubbercap bumpers should also be lubricated. Part C tells youwhat to use. More frequent lubrication may be requiredwhen exposed to a corrosive environment.

Parking Brake CheckPark on a fairly steep hill and hold the vehicle with theparking brake only. This checks holding ability. SeeParking Brake (With Hydraulic Brakes) on page 2-38 orParking Brake (With Air Brakes) on page 2-41.

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, the vehiclecould move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you orothers could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regularbrakes.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready toturn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start theengine in each gear. The starter should work only inP (Park) or N (Neutral). If the starter works in anyother position, your vehicle needs service. Onmanual transmission vehicles, the starter shouldwork only when the clutch pedal is all the way down.

6-27

Automatic Transmission Shift IndicatorCheckCheck that the indicator points to the gear chosen.

Steering CheckBe alert for any changes in steering action, abnormalfront tire wear or steering wheel position. An inspectionor service is needed when the steering wheel isharder to turn or has too much free play, or if there arestrange sounds when turning or parking.

Brake System CheckBe alert to the low air warning light or tone alarm, orchanges in braking action, such as repeated pulling toone side, unusual sounds when braking or increasedbrake pedal travel. Make sure air brake system reservoirsare drained daily with full system air pressure, and checksystem for leaks. Any of these conditions could indicatethe need for brake system inspection and/or service.

Engine Cooling System ServiceInspect the hoses and have them replaced if they arecracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,fittings, and clamps; replace as needed. Clean theoutside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser. Tohelp ensure proper operation, a pressure test of thecooling system and pressure cap is recommended atleast once a year.

Exhaust System InspectionBe alert for any changes in the sound of the exhaustsystem or any smell of fumes. These are signs thesystem may be leaking. Have it checked and/or repairedat once. See Engine Exhaust on page 2-45 andRunning the Vehicle While Parked on page 2-50.

Check to be sure that mud or dirt is not caked on theexhaust system, especially in the area of the dieselparticulate filter and tailpipe. Clean the area as needed.See Diesel Particulate Filter on page 2-46.

At high mileages, the DPF becomes loaded with ash.This is normal. When the amount of ash loading is high,see your dealer/retailer for DPF cleaning or replacement.

Windshield Wipers and WashersCheckCheck operation and condition of the wiper blades.Check the flow of the washer spray.

Defroster CheckMove the control to the defrost symbol and the fan to HIor the high symbol. Then check the airflow from theducts at the inside base of the windshield.

6-28

Mirrors and Sun Visors CheckCheck that friction joints hold mirrors and sun visors inplace.

Seat Adjuster CheckWhen adjusting a manual seat, be sure seat adjusterslatch by attempting to move the seat after latching.

Lamps CheckCheck panel lighting, warning lights, indicator lights, andinterior lamps. On the outside, check: license plate lamps,sidemarker lamps, reflectors or lights on outside mirrors,headlamps, parking lamps, identification and clearancelamps, taillamps, brake lamps, turn signals, backuplamps, and hazard warning flashers. Have headlamp aimchecked at once if beams seem improperly aimed.

Glass, Mirrors, Lamps, and/orReflectors Condition CheckLook for broken, scratched, dirty, or damaged glass,mirrors, lamps, or reflectors that could reduce the viewor visibility or cause injury. Replace, clean, or repairpromptly.

Door Latches CheckCheck that doors close, latch, and lock tightly. Check forbroken, damaged, or missing parts that might preventtight latching.

Hood Latches CheckCheck that the hood closes firmly. Check for broken,damaged, loose, or missing parts that might prevent tightlatching. Make sure the secondary latch, if the vehiclehas one, keeps the hood from opening all the way whenthe primary latch is released.

6-29

Fluid Leaks CheckCheck for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks bylooking at the surface beneath the vehicle after it hasbeen parked for awhile.

Underbody InspectionCorrosive materials used for ice, snow removal, and dustcontrol can collect on the underbody. If these materialsare not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occuron underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system. At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbody with plain water. Take careto clean well any areas where mud and other debris cancollect. Sediment packed in closed areas of the frameshould be loosened before being flushed.

Engine Cover CheckCheck that the cab’s engine cover and seal, if thevehicle has one, are not torn or damaged. Be sure thatthe cover is clamped down firmly to the floor.

At Least Once a Year

Key Lock Cylinders ServiceLubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricantspecified in Part C.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Take care toclean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debriscan collect.

Tractor Protection (Breakaway) ValveCheckOn air brake models, remove, disassemble, clean, andinspect the tractor protection (breakaway) valve.

6-30

Part C: Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, partnumber, or specification can be obtained from yourdealer/retailer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil(GasolineEngine)

Engine oil which meets GM StandardGM6094M and displays theAmerican Petroleum Institute (API)Certified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see “Engine Oil” in the Index.

Engine Oil(DURAMAX®/Isuzu Diesel

Engines)

Engine oils with the letters CJ-4 arerequired for your vehicle. The CJ-4designation can appear either aloneor in combination with otherAmerican Petroleum Institute (API)designations, such as API CJ-4/SL.These letters show API levels ofquality. To determine the preferredviscosity for your vehicle’s dieselengine, see “Engine Oil” in the Index.

Engine Oil(Caterpillar®

Diesel Engine)

See the Caterpillar® Operation &Maintenance Manual for engine oilrecommendations.

Usage Fluid/LubricantEngine Coolant

(Caterpillar®Diesel Engine)

See the Caterpillar® Operation &Maintenance Manual for enginecoolant recommendations.

Engine Coolant(GasolineEngine &

DURAMAX®/Isuzu Diesel

Engines)

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant(Caterpillar Diesel Engines) onpage 5-47.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher Solvent Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Clutch BearingLubricant

Clutch Bearing Lubricant (GM PartNo. 12378484 or equivalent NLGI#3 consistency).

Exhaust BrakeBall Joint Cap

Lubricant

High-Temperature Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 1051344,in Canada 903037) or NLGI #3consistency.

Power SteeringSystem

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

ManualTransmission

Synthetic Manual Transmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 88861952,in Canada 88861953).

AutomaticTransmission

See the Allison Transmission®

Operator’s Manual for correcttransmission fluid.

6-31


Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

ChassisLubrication

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Front WheelBearings

(Except OilFilled Hubs)

Wheel bearing lubricant meetingrequirements of NLGI #2,Category GC or GC-LB(GM Part No. U.S. 1051344,in Canada 993037).

Front WheelBearings withOil Filled Hubs

SAE 75W-90 Synthetic AxleLubricant for Medium Duty Trucks(GM Part No. U.S. 89021675,in Canada 10953512).

Transfer Case(Four-Wheel

Drive)

Manual Transmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 88861800,in Canada 88861801).

Front Axle(Four-Wheel

Drive)



Rear Axle andRear Hubs


Rear Axle ShiftMotor Lubricant

Refrigerant Oil(GM Part No. U.S. 5416939,in Canada 10953496).

Propshafts andSplines

Wheel bearing lubricant meetingrequirements of NLGI #2,Category GC or GC-LB(GM Part No. U.S. 1051344,in Canada 993037).

Cab — DoorHinges and

Latches

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

WeatherstripSqueaks

Synthetic Greasewith Teflon, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,in Canada 10953437).

6-32

Part D: Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service, andany additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” on the following record pages. Also, you shouldretain all maintenance receipts.

Date Miles/km OrHours Serviced By Maintenance Record

6-33


6-34


6-35


6-36

Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2Customer Assistance for Text Telephone

(TTY) Users ...............................................7-4Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-5Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-5Collision Damage Repair .................................7-6

Reporting Safety Defects ..................................7-9Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ............................7-9Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .................................7-9Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ...........................................7-9Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-10

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ................7-11Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy

(Isuzu 7.8L L6 Engine) ...............................7-11Event Data Recorders

(Isuzu 7.8L L6 Engine) ...............................7-12OnStar® (Isuzu 7.8L L6 Engine) ......................7-13Navigation System (Isuzu

7.8L L6 Engine) ........................................7-13Radio Frequency Identification (RFID)

(Isuzu 7.8L L6 Engine) ...............................7-13

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

7-1

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are important to yourdealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with thesales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will beresolved by the dealer’s sales or service departments.Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of allconcerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concernhas not been resolved to your satisfaction, the followingsteps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member ofdealership management. Normally, concerns can bequickly resolved at that level. If the matter has alreadybeen reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager,contact the owner of the dealership or the generalmanager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealershipmanagement, it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership without further help, call theGM Medium Duty Truck Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-862-4389. In Canada, call GM of CanadaCustomer Communication Centre in Oshawa at1-800-263-3777 (English), or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available to give the CustomerAssistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This isavailable from the vehicle registration or title, or theplate at the top left of the instrument panel andvisible through the windshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.

When contacting Chevrolet, remember that yourconcern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.That is why we suggest following Step One first.

7-2

STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealerare committed to making sure you are completelysatisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continueto remain unsatisfied after following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with theBBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional rightsyou may have. Canadian owners refer to your Warrantyand Owner Assistance Information booklet for informationon the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP).

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court programadministered by the Council of Better Business Bureausto settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Although you may be required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,use of the program is free of charge and your case willgenerally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agreewith the decision given in your case, you may reject it andproceed with any other venue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using thetoll-free telephone number or write them at the followingaddress:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and theDistrict of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,mileage, and other factors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibility limitations and/ordiscontinue its participation in this program.

7-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, orspeech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. cancommunicate with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV(2438). (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesChevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. However, if a customer wishesto write or e-mail, refer to the addresses below.

United States — Customer AssistanceGM Medium Duty Truck Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 44947Detroit, MI 48244

www.Chevrolet.com1-800-TO-CHEVY (862-4389)1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General Motors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America and CaribbeanIslands/Countries (Except Puerto Ricoand U.S. Virgin Islands) — CustomerAssistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

7-4

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants, canreimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period of timefrom the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For moredetails, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visitgmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTYusers call 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside Assistance ProgramGM Medium Duty truck’s Roadside Assistance providesstranded owner/operators with towing service fordisabled GM Medium Duty trucks, during the baseand/or engine warranty period, to the nearest authorizedGM Medium Duty dealer. This service combines theefforts of trained telephone representatives with anetwork of GM Medium Duty truck services.

Call GM Medium Duty truck’s Roadside Assistance at1-800-862-4389 to reach a qualified representative whocan assist you in arranging a tow to the nearest GMMedium Duty truck dealer when your vehicle is disabled.We also provide dealer information at no charge,such as location of the nearest authorized GM MediumDuty truck dealer and their hours of operation.

Our Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,7 days a week, 365 days a year which includesweekends and holidays. Should you have questionsabout GM Medium Duty truck Roadside Assistance, callthe GM Medium Duty Roadside Assistance Center orcontact your dealer.

Canadian Roadside AssistanceWhenever a Medium Duty truck owned and operated inCanada becomes disabled, the owner/operator shouldcontact the Canadian Roadside Assistance Centerat 1-800-268-6800 for assistance.

7-5

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is damaged,have the damage repaired by a qualified technician usingthe proper equipment and quality replacement parts.Poorly performed collision repairs diminish your vehicle’sresale value, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with thesame materials and construction methods as the partswith which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are your best choice to ensure that yourvehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also be used forrepair. These parts are typically removed from vehiclesthat were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,the parts being recycled are from undamaged sectionsof the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GMpart, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your

vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these parts is notknown. Such parts are not covered by your GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failuresare not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These aremade by companies other than GM and may not havebeen tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts mayfit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure relatedto such parts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityWe recommend that you choose a collision repairfacility that meets your needs before you ever needcollision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have acollision repair center with GM-trained technicians andstate of the art equipment, or be able to recommenda collision repair center that has GM-trained techniciansand comparable equipment.

7-6

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in the quality of coverageafforded by various insurance policy terms. Manyinsurance policies provide reduced protection to your GMvehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs byusing aftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, we recommend that youassure your vehicle will be repaired with GM originalequipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage isnot available from your current insurance carrier,consider switching to another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company mayrequire you to have insurance that assures repairs withGenuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged atthe end of your lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in a crash.

• Check to make sure that you are all right. If youare uninjured, make sure that no one else in yourvehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call emergency servicesfor help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of. Move your vehicleonly if its position puts you in danger or you areinstructed to move it by a police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requested informationto police and other parties involved in the crash.Do not discuss your personal condition, mentalframe of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.This will help guard against post-crash legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, call GM RoadsideAssistance. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 7-5 for more information.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where thetowing service will be taking it. Get a card from thetow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,the service’s name, and the phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it istowed away. Make sure this includes your insuranceinformation and registration if you keep these itemsin your vehicle.

7-7

• Gather the important information you will need fromthe other driver. Things like name, address, phonenumber, driver’s license number, vehicle licenseplate, vehicle make, model and model year, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), insurance company andpolicy number, and a general description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company from thescene of the crash. They will walk you through theinformation they will need. If they ask for a policereport, phone or go to the police departmentheadquarters the next day and you can get a copy ofthe report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinceswith “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not benecessary. This is especially true if there are noinjuries and both vehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for yourvehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or aprivate collision repair facility to fix the damage,make sure you are comfortable with them.Remember, you will have to feel comfortable withtheir work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully andmake sure you understand what work will beperformed on your vehicle. If you have a question,ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcomethis opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle Damage RepairProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair.If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, takeyour vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to thefacility that any required replacement collision parts beoriginal equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts orrecycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled partswill not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must livewith the repair. Depending on your policy limits, yourinsurance company may initially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repairprofessional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Rememberif your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have thevehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if yourinsurance coverage does not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is paying for therepairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair valuationbased on that insurance company’s collision policy repairlimits, as you have no contractual limits with thatcompany. In such cases, you can have control of therepair and parts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

7-8

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individual problems betweenyou, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go to safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington D.C., 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, in addition to notifying General Motors ofCanada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) ina situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.Please call us at 1-800-862-4389, or write:

GM Medium Duty TruckCustomer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 44947Detroit, MI 48244

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

7-9

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axle suspension,brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give additional technical serviceinformation needed to knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis and service ofyour vehicle.

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically for ownersand intended to provide basic operational informationabout the vehicle. The owner manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for all models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, andWarranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals are availablefor current and past model GM vehicles. To requestan order form, specify year and model name ofthe vehicle.

7-10

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice and withoutincurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to makechecks payable in U.S. funds.

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy(Isuzu 7.8L L6 Engine)Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticatedcomputers that record information about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven. For example,your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmission performance, to monitorthe conditions for airbag deployment and deployairbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle.These modules may store data to help yourdealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Somemodules may also store data about how you operate thevehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or averagespeed. These modules may also retain the owner’spersonal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seatpositions, and temperature settings.

7-11

Event Data Recorders(Isuzu 7.8L L6 Engine)This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbagdeployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how a vehicle’s systemsperformed. The EDR is designed to record data relatedto vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a shortperiod of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDRin this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safetybelts were buckled/fastened

• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal

• How fast the vehicle was traveling

This data can help provide a better understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle onlyif a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recordedby the EDR under normal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crashlocation) is recorded. However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine the EDR data with the typeof personally identifying data routinely acquired during acrash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment isrequired, and access to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, otherparties, such as law enforcement, that have the specialequipment, can read the information if they haveaccess to the vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data or share it with othersexcept: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; inresponse to an official request of police or similargovernment office; as part of GM’s defense of litigationthrough the discovery process; or, as required by law.Data that GM collects or receives may also be used forGM research needs or may be made available to othersfor research purposes, where a need is shown and thedata is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.

7-12

OnStar® (Isuzu 7.8L L6 Engine)If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to theOnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms andConditions for information on data collection and use.

Navigation System (Isuzu7.8L L6 Engine)If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of thesystem may result in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, and other tripinformation. Refer to the navigation system operatingmanual for information on stored data and for deletioninstructions.

Radio Frequency Identification(RFID) (Isuzu 7.8L L6 Engine)RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functionssuch as tire pressure monitoring and ignition systemsecurity, as well as in connection with conveniencessuch as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking andstarting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage dooropeners. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not useor record personal information or link with any otherGM system containing personal information.

7-13

✍ NOTES

7-14

AAccessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-19Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment ......... 4-22Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................... 1-58Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-7Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-95Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-38Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-20Air Pressure Gage .......................................... 3-47Air Suspension ............................................... 2-44Air Suspension Seats ........................................ 1-6Airbag

Off Light ..................................................... 3-28Readiness Light .......................................... 3-27

Airbag System ................................................ 1-48Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ................................................... 1-58Airbag Off Switch ........................................ 1-55How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-53Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-58What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-53What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? .................................................. 1-54When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-52Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-50

Antenna, Fixed Mast ....................................... 3-58Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............................. 4-5Antilock Brake, System Warning Light ................ 3-33Antilock Brakes, Trailer System

Warning Light ............................................. 3-34Appearance Care

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 5-92Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-89Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-93Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-90Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-88Finish Care ................................................. 5-90Finish Damage ............................................ 5-93Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ....................................... 5-89Interior Cleaning .......................................... 5-87Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-93Tires .......................................................... 5-92Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-93Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-90Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-89Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-91

Ashtray ......................................................... 3-19Audio System ................................................. 3-48

Chime Level Adjustment ............................... 3-58Fixed Mast Antenna ..................................... 3-58Radio Reception .......................................... 3-58Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-48Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ 3-57

1

Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-49Automatic Transmission

Fluid .......................................................... 5-42Operation ................................................... 2-27

BBattery .......................................................... 5-61Bench Seat, Split ............................................. 1-6Brake

Diesel Engine Exhaust ................................. 2-26Emergencies ................................................ 4-5Exhaust Indicator Light ................................. 3-41Trailer Hand Control Valve .............................. 4-6

Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-52Brakes .......................................................... 5-52

Hydraulic Systems ......................................... 4-4Parking Brake Burnish Procedure ................... 2-43System Warning Light .................................. 3-31

Braking ........................................................... 4-4Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-5Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-10Bucket Seats ................................................... 1-2Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-71Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-79

CCalifornia Perchlorate Materials

Requirements ............................................... 5-4California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-4Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-102Carbon Monoxide ................................... 2-45, 4-17Care of

Safety Belts ................................................ 5-89Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-53Change Fuel Filter Warning Light ...................... 3-45Charging System Light .................................... 3-29Check

Engine Lamp .............................................. 3-36Gages Warning Light ................................... 3-43

Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-22Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-93Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-36Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-32Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 1-40Older Children ............................................. 1-28Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Outside Seat Position ............................... 1-40Securing a Child Restraint in the Center

Front Seat Position ................................... 1-44

2

Child Restraints (cont.)Securing a Child Restraint in the Center

Rear Seat Position ................................... 1-42Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position ................................... 1-44Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-38

Chime Level Adjustment .................................. 3-58Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-19Cleaning

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .............. 5-92Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. 5-90Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-88Finish Care ................................................. 5-90Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ....................................... 5-89Interior ....................................................... 5-87Tires .......................................................... 5-92Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-93Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-90Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-89Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-91

Climate Control System ................................... 3-20Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-22Rear Heating System ................................... 3-23

Clock, Setting ................................................. 3-48Collision Damage Repair ................................... 7-6Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-3

CoolantEngine ....................................................... 5-47Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-34Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-35Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-47

Cooling System .............................................. 5-43Cruise Control ................................................ 3-10Customer Assistance Information

Customer Assistance for Text Telephone(TTY) Users .............................................. 7-4

Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-5Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors ........ 7-9Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian

Government .............................................. 7-9Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .......................... 7-9Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-5Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-10

DDaytime Running Lamp ................................... 3-15Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light ............. 3-42Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2

3

Diesel Engine ................................................. 2-26Engine Alarm and Automatic Shutdown ........... 2-18Exhaust Restrictor ....................................... 2-22Fuel ............................................................ 5-8High Idle System ......................................... 2-20Starting ...................................................... 2-14

Diesel Particulate Filter .................................... 2-46Diesel Particulate Filter Warning Light ................ 3-46Differential Lock Control, Rear Axle ..................... 4-7Differential Lock Indicator Light ......................... 3-41Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-5Dome Lamps ................................................. 3-16Door

Locks .......................................................... 2-6Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-7

DrivingAt Night ..................................................... 4-13Defensive ..................................................... 4-2Drunken ....................................................... 4-3Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 4-15Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-16In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-14Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-19Tow Hooks ................................................. 4-20Winter ........................................................ 4-17

Driving for Better Fuel Economy ......................... 4-2Dual Tire Operation ......................................... 5-78

EEDR ............................................................. 7-11Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-95Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-96Fusible Links .............................................. 5-95Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 5-95Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-96Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-96Underhood Fuse Block ................................. 5-99Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-95

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-38Alarm and Automatic Shutdown ..................... 2-18Change Engine Oil Light ............................... 3-39Check and Service Engine Soon Lamp ........... 3-36Checks Before Operating .............................. 2-23Coolant ...................................................... 5-47Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-25Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-34Diesel Engine Exhaust Brake ........................ 2-26Drive Belt Routing ...................................... 5-110Exhaust ..................................................... 2-45Exhaust Restrictor ....................................... 2-22Fan Breakage ............................................... 5-6Fan Noise .................................................. 5-49High Idle System ......................................... 2-20Oil .................................... 5-24, 5-27, 5-28, 5-32Oil Life System ........................... 5-35, 5-36, 5-38

4

Engine (cont.)Overheating ................................................ 5-48Overspeed Warning Light .............................. 3-40Reduced Power Light ................................... 3-42Shutdown Warning Light ............................... 3-40Speed Limiter ............................................. 3-25Starter Over-Crank Protection ........................ 2-12Starting Diesel ............................................ 2-14Starting the Gasoline ................................... 2-12

Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-17Event Data Recorders ..................................... 7-12Exhaust Brake Indicator Light ........................... 3-41Exhaust Restrictor ........................................... 2-22Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-28Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-14

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-38Filter Minder Gage .......................................... 3-46Finish Damage ............................................... 5-93Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-58Flashers, Hazard Warning .................................. 3-6Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-85Fluid

Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-42Power Steering ........................................... 5-49Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-50

Four-Wheel Drive .................................... 2-30, 5-68

Front Axle ...................................................... 5-69Front Wheel Bearings with

Oil-Filled Hubs ............................................ 5-75Fuel ............................................................... 5-6

Additives ...................................................... 5-7Change Filter Warning Light .......................... 3-45Diesel Engine Fuel ........................................ 5-8Driving for Better Economy ............................. 4-2Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-22Filling the Tank ........................................... 5-20Filter .......................................................... 5-72Filter Replacement ....................................... 5-18Fuels in Foreign Countries ............................ 5-19Gage ......................................................... 3-44Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-6Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-7Primary Filter and Water Separator ................ 5-73Running Out of Fuel .................................... 5-17Secondary Filter and Water

Separator/Heater ...................................... 5-74Very Cold Weather Operation ........................ 5-11Water in Fuel .............................................. 5-11Water in Warning Light ................................. 3-45What Fuel to Use .......................................... 5-8

FusesFuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-96Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-96Underhood Fuse Block ................................. 5-99Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-95

5

GGage

Air Pressure ............................................... 3-47Check Gages Warning Light .......................... 3-43Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-34Filter Minder ............................................... 3-46Fuel .......................................................... 3-44Hourmeter .................................................. 3-47Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-38Speedometer .............................................. 3-25Tachometer ................................................. 3-25Transmission Temperature ............................. 3-40Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 3-30

GasolineOctane ........................................................ 5-6Specifications ............................................... 5-7

Gasoline Engine, Starting ................................. 2-12GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-5

HHazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-95Headlamps

Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-71Daytime Running Lamp ................................ 3-15Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-14High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8On Reminder .............................................. 3-14

Heater ........................................................... 3-20Engine Coolant ........................................... 2-25

High Idle System ............................................ 2-20Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-42Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-15Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-16Hood

Checking Things Under ................................ 5-22Latches ...................................................... 5-23

Horn ............................................................... 3-6Hourmeter Gage ............................................. 3-47How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-16

IIgnition Positions ............................................. 2-11Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-32Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-77Instrument Panel

Brightness .................................................. 3-16Cluster ....................................................... 3-24Overview ..................................................... 3-4Switchbank ................................................. 3-18

JJump Starting ................................................. 5-62

6

KKeyless Entry System ....................................... 2-3Keys ............................................................... 2-2

LLamp

Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-36Lamps

Dome ........................................................ 3-16Marker ....................................................... 3-16Reading ..................................................... 3-17

Lap Belt ........................................................ 1-27Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... 1-24LATCH System for Child Restraints ................... 1-40Light

Airbag Off .................................................. 3-28Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-27Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning ............ 3-33Brake System Warning ................................. 3-31Change Engine Oil ...................................... 3-39Change Fuel Filter Warning .......................... 3-45Charging System ......................................... 3-29Check Gages Warning ................................. 3-43Daytime Running Lamps Indicator .................. 3-42Diesel Particulate Filter Warning .................... 3-46Differential Lock Indicator .............................. 3-41Engine Overspeed Warning ........................... 3-40

Light (cont.)Engine Shutdown Warning ............................ 3-40Exhaust Brake Indicator ................................ 3-41Highbeam On ............................................. 3-42Low Coolant Warning ................................... 3-35Low Oil Level ............................................. 3-39Low Washer Fluid Warning ........................... 3-43Power Take-Off ........................................... 3-43Range Inhibit Warning Indicator ..................... 3-31Reduced Engine Power ................................ 3-42Safety Belt Reminders .................................. 3-26Service Transmission Warning ....................... 3-30Trailer Antilock Brake System Warning ............ 3-34Wait to Start Indicator .................................. 3-35Water in Fuel Warning ................................. 3-45

LightingEntry ......................................................... 3-17

LightsExterior Lamps ............................................ 3-14High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8On Reminder .............................................. 3-14

Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-20Locks

Door ........................................................... 2-6Power Door .................................................. 2-7

Loss of Control ............................................... 4-12Low Coolant Warning Light .............................. 3-35Low Washer Fluid Warning Light ....................... 3-43Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ............. 1-40

7

MMaintenance, Replacement Parts ..................... 5-108Maintenance Schedule

At Each Fuel Fill ......................................... 6-26At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-30At Least Twice a Year .................................. 6-27How This Section is Organized ....................... 6-3Introduction .................................................. 6-2Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ......... 6-4Part B - Owner Checks and Services ............. 6-26Part C - Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants ............................................... 6-31Part D - Maintenance Record ........................ 6-33Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-5Scheduled Maintenance Supplements ............... 6-4Using .......................................................... 6-4Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2

Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............................... 3-36Manual Transmission

Fluid .......................................................... 5-42Operation ................................................... 2-28

Manual Windows .............................................. 2-9Marker Lamps ................................................ 3-16Mirrors

Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-51Outside Convex Mirrors ................................ 2-52Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-52Outside Manual Mirrors ................................ 2-51Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-51

NNavigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-13New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-10Noise Control System, Tampering ...................... 5-70

OOdometer ...................................................... 3-25Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-25Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-11Oil

Change Engine Oil Light ............................... 3-39Engine ............................... 5-24, 5-27, 5-28, 5-32Low Oil Level Light ...................................... 3-39Pressure Gage ............................................ 3-38

Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............. 5-35, 5-36, 5-38Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-28OnStar, Privacy .............................................. 7-13Other Service Items

Front Wheel Bearings withOil-Filled Hubs ......................................... 5-75

Primary Fuel Filter and Water Separator ......... 5-73Secondary Fuel Filter and Water

Separator/Heater ...................................... 5-74Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-22Outlets

Accessory Power ......................................... 3-19

8

OutsideConvex Mirrors ............................................ 2-52Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-52Manual Mirrors ............................................ 2-51Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-51

Overspeed Warning Light ................................. 3-40

PPaint, Damage ............................................... 5-93Park Brake ............................................ 2-38, 2-41Parking ......................................................... 2-35

Brake Burnish Procedure .............................. 2-43Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-44Two-Speed Rear Axle .................................. 2-36

Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ............ 6-4Part B - Owner Checks and Services ................ 6-26Part C - Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants .................................................. 6-31Part D - Maintenance Record ........................... 6-33Passing ......................................................... 4-11Perchlorate Materials Requirements,

California ..................................................... 5-4Power

Door Locks .................................................. 2-7Electrical System ......................................... 5-96Reduced Engine Light .................................. 3-42Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-49Windows ...................................................... 2-9

Power Take-Off Light ....................................... 3-43

Power Take-Off (PTO) ..................................... 2-30Privacy .......................................................... 7-11

Event Data Recorders .................................. 7-12Navigation System ....................................... 7-13OnStar ....................................................... 7-13Radio Frequency Identification ....................... 7-13

RRadio Frequency Identification (RFID),

Privacy ...................................................... 7-13Radio(s) ........................................................ 3-49Radios

Reception ................................................... 3-58Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-48Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-57

Range Inhibit Warning Indicator ........................ 3-31Reading Lamps .............................................. 3-17Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-67

Differential Lock Control ................................. 4-7Shift Motor ................................................. 5-68

Rear Heating System ...................................... 3-23Rear Seat Operation ....................................... 1-10Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-51Reduced Engine Power Light ............................ 3-42Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .................. 2-3Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,

Operation ..................................................... 2-4Replacement Parts, Maintenance ..................... 5-108

9

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government ................................... 7-9General Motors ............................................. 7-9United States Government .............................. 7-9

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-59Replacing Restraint System Parts After a

Crash ..................................................... 1-60Roadside

Assistance Program ....................................... 7-5Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-19Routing, Engine Drive Belt .............................. 5-110Running Out of Fuel ........................................ 5-17Running the Vehicle While Parked ..................... 2-50

SSafety Belt Reminders ..................................... 3-26Safety Belts

Care of ...................................................... 5-89How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-16Lap Belt ..................................................... 1-27Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................ 1-24Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-28Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-26Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-11

Safety Warnings and Symbols ............................... iiScheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-5Scheduled Maintenance Supplements .................. 6-4

SeatsAir Suspension Seats .................................... 1-6Bucket Seats ................................................ 1-2Rear Seat Operation .................................... 1-10Split Bench Seat ........................................... 1-6

Securing a Child RestraintCenter Front Seat Position ............................ 1-44Center Rear Seat Position ............................ 1-42Rear Outside Seat Position ........................... 1-40Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-44

Service ........................................................... 5-3Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3California Perchlorate Materials

Requirements ............................................ 5-4California Proposition 65 Warning .................... 5-4Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-5Engine Fan Breakage .................................... 5-6Engine Soon Lamp ...................................... 3-36Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-10Transmission Warning Light .......................... 3-30

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-58Setting the Clock ............................................ 3-48Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-93Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-7Sliding Rear Windows ....................................... 2-9Snow Plow .................................................... 4-22Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-102Speedometer .................................................. 3-25Split Bench Seat .............................................. 1-6Starting Diesel Engine ..................................... 2-14

10

Starting the Gasoline Engine ............................ 2-12Steering .......................................................... 4-9Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6Storage Areas ................................................ 2-53

Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-53Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 4-19Sun Visors ...................................................... 2-9Suspension, Air .............................................. 2-44Switchbanks, Instrument Panel .......................... 3-18

TTachometer .................................................... 3-25Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-57Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6Time, Setting .................................................. 3-48Tires ............................................................. 5-76

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,Cleaning ................................................. 5-92

Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-79Cleaning .................................................... 5-92Dual Tire Operation ..................................... 5-78If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-85Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-77Tightening the Wheel Nuts ............................ 5-80

Tires (cont.)Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-80Wheel Loading ............................................ 5-78Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-84When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-78

Tow Hooks ..................................................... 4-20Towing

Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-23Traction

Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-8Trailer

Connections ................................................ 4-25Trailer Brake Hand Control Valve ........................ 4-6Transmission

Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-42Fluid, Manual .............................................. 5-42Service Warning Light .................................. 3-30Temperature Gage ....................................... 3-40

Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-27Transmission Operation, Manual ........................ 2-28Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-25Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-7Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7Two-Speed Rear Axle ...................................... 2-36

11

VVehicle

Control ........................................................ 4-3Loading ...................................................... 4-20Running While Parked .................................. 2-50Symbols ......................................................... iii

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .................. 7-11Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-94Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-94

Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-22Visors ............................................................. 2-9Voltmeter Gage .............................................. 3-30

WWait to Start Indicator ...................................... 3-35Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............... 3-23Warnings

Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6Safety and Symbols ......................................... ii

Washer Fluid, Low Warning Light ...................... 3-43Water

Fuel .......................................................... 5-11Water in Fuel Warning Light ............................. 3-45What Fuel to Use ............................................. 5-8

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-80Front Bearings with Oil-Filled Hubs ................ 5-75Loading ...................................................... 5-78Replacement ............................................... 5-84Tightening the Wheel Nuts ............................ 5-80

Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-38Windows ......................................................... 2-8

Manual ........................................................ 2-9Power ......................................................... 2-9Sliding Rear ................................................. 2-9

WindshieldWasher ........................................................ 3-9Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-50Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-71Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 5-91Wiper Fuses ............................................... 5-95Wipers ......................................................... 3-8

Winter Driving ................................................ 4-17

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2

12

2009 Chevrolet Kodiak Manual en CA

Documents

Transcript of 2009 Chevrolet Kodiak Manual en CA